0% found this document useful (0 votes)

3 views

D4B8025554C Electrical System

The document is a workshop manual for the ŠKODA Rapid NH models from 2013 and 2014, focusing on the electrical system. It includes technical data, safety instructions, repair instructions, and detailed procedures for components such as the battery, starter, and alternator. The manual emphasizes the importance of following safety precautions and adhering to technical information for vehicle road-worthiness and safety.

Uploaded by

Alexandru Iliescu

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

3 views

D4B8025554C Electrical System

Uploaded by

Alexandru Iliescu

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 265

Service

Workshop Manual
Rapid NH 2013 ➤
Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system
Edition 12.2019

Service Department. Technical Information

Service
List of Workshop Manual Repair Groups

Repair Group
00 - Technical data
27 - Starter, current supply, CCS
90 - Gauges, instruments
91 - Radio, telephone, navigation
92 - Windscreen wash/wipe system
94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior
96 - Lights, bulbs, switches - interior
97 - Wiring

Technical information should always be available to the foremen and mechanics, because their
careful and constant adherence to the instructions is essential to ensure vehicle road-worthiness and
safety. In addition, the normal basic safety precautions for working on motor vehicles must, as a
matter of course, be observed.

All rights reserved.

No reproduction without prior agreement from publisher.

Copyright © 2020 ŠKODA AUTO a. s. D4B8025554C

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

Contents

00 - Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1 Safety precautions when working on vehicles with start-stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2 Safety precautions during road tests in which testing and measuring equipment is used . . 1
1.3 Use and safety instructions for gas discharge lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2 Repair instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.1 Contact corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.2 Cable routing and securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
3 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3.1 Warning instructions and safety precautions when working on the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3.2 Battery types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

27 - Starter, current supply, CCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

1 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.1 Assembly overview - battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.2 Summary of components - battery isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1.4 Checking battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1.5 Charging battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1.6 Removing and installing battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1.7 Removing and installing earth lead with battery monitoring control unit J367 . . . . . . . . . . 18
1.8 Removing and installing battery isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
1.9 Battery parameterisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
1.10 Removing and installing battery tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2 Jump start point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
2.1 Summary ofbycomponents
Protected copyright. Copying-for
jump
privatestart point purposes,
or commercial . . . . in. .part
. .or. in. whole,
. . . .is. not
. .permitted
................... 24
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
2.2 Removing and toinstalling
with respect jump
the correctness start point
of information . . . . .Copyright
in this document. . . . . . by. .ŠKODA
. . . .AUTO
. . . A.. .S.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
3 Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
3.1 Assembly overview: starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
3.2 Removing and installing starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
3.3 Checking starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
4 Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
4.1 Removing and installing alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
4.2 Fixing the B+ wire to the AC generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
4.3 Checking the carbon brushes of the AC generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
4.4 Removing and installing voltage regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
4.5 Removing and installing V-ribbed belt pulley on alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
5 start-stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
5.1 Safety precautions for vehicles with start-stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
5.2 General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
5.3 Fault recognition and fault display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
5.4 Battery recharging or starting by external source on vehicles with start-stop system . . . . 49
5.5 Replacing the battery on vehicles with “start-stop” system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
5.6 Voltage stabiliser J532 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
5.7 Battery monitor control unit J367 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
5.8 Button for start-stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
6 Front Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
6.1 Installation location overview - Front Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
6.2 Removing and installing front assistant system control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
6.3 Removing and installing the retaining plate of the front assistant system control unit . . . . 53
6.4 Calibrating the front assistant system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Contents i
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

90 - Gauges, instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
1 Dash panel insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
1.1 General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
1.2 The self-diagnostic function of the dash panel insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
1.3 Adjust/replace dash panel insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
1.4 Removing and installing the dash panel insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
1.5 Contact assignment of plug connection on the dash panel insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
1.6 Warning lights in the dash panel insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
1.7 Service interval display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
2 Cruise control system (CCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

91 - Radio, telephone, navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

1 Radio - installed up to CW 21.2015 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
1.1 General Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
1.2 Electronic anti-theft coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
1.3 Summary of components - radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
1.4 Removing and installing a radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
1.5 Plug connections on the radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
1.6 Self-diagnostic function of radio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
2 Amundsen+ navigation system - installed up to CW 21.2015 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
2.1 General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
2.2 General Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
2.3 Electronic anti-theft coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
2.4 Overall view of the navigation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
2.5 Removing and installing the navigation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
2.6 Plug connections on the navigation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
2.7 Aerial for GPS signal reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
2.8 Diagnosis of the navigation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
3 Infotainment system - installed as of CW 22.2015 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
3.1 Infotainment system - general notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
3.2 Summary of components - Infotainment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
3.3 Installation – Infotainment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
3.4 Removing and installing the Infotainment display/control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
3.5 Removing and installing the infotainment control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
3.6 Electronic anti-theft coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
3.7 “Basic” (Blues) infotainment - initial setup, self-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
4 Replacing aerials, aerial modules and aerial cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
4.1 Overview of locations where aerial systems are fitted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
4.2 Removing and installing roof antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
4.3 Removing and installing the GPS aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
4.4 Removing and installing the GSM aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
4.5 Rear or side window aerial (Spaceback) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
4.6 Panoramic roof aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
4.7 Aerial module R254 for rear window aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
4.8 Aerial module for rear left side window aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
4.9 Aerial module for panoramic roof aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
4.10 Replace and repair aerial
unless cables
authorised by ŠKODA. . AUTO
. . . .A.. S.. .ŠKODA
. . . .AUTO
. . . A.
. .S.. does
. . .not
. .guarantee
. . . . . or. accept
. . . . any
. . liability
........ 95
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
5 Telephone system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
5.1 Mobile phone pre-installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
5.2 Removing and installing the control unit for the mobile phone operating electronics J412
........................................................................ 96
5.3 Removing and installing the microphone for the telephone R38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
6 Multi-functional steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
6.1 Multi-functional steering wheel - general instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

ii Contents
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

6.2 Removing and installing the multi-function buttons on the steering wheel E441 / E440 . . 98
7 Multimedia socket MEDIA-IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
7.1 General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
7.2 Removing and installing the control unit for multimedia system J650 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
7.3 Removing and installing connection for external audio sources R199 (AUX-IN, USB) . . . . 101
7.4 Removing and installing the rear USB charging module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
8 Loudspeaker arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
8.1 Removing and installing front bass speaker and rear full-range speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
8.2 Removing and installing the front treble speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
9 SmartLink system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
9.1 SmartLink system - general instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
10 SmartGate system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
10.1 SmartGate system - general notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
10.2 SmartGate system - check the correct function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
10.3 Removing and installing the control unit for wireless data transfer J1070 (SmartGate) . . . . 109
10.4 Set the parameters for the Wi-Fi connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
10.5 Update firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
11 Mobile services online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
11.1 General Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
11.2 Installation location overview - mobile online services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
11.3 Removing and installing control unit for emergency call module and communication unit J949
...................................................................... 115
11.4 Removing and installing emergency call button E276 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
11.5 Removing and installing speaker for emergency call module R335 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
11.6 Replacing, adapting and activating control unit for emergency call module and
communication unit J949 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
11.7 Checking that the components and communication of the ERA Glonass system are
functioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
11.8 Replacing battery for control unit for emergency call module and communication unit J949
........................................................................ 121

92 - Windscreen wash/wipe system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

1 Windscreen washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
1.1 Removing and installing washer fluid reservoir, washer fluid pumps and sensor for washer
fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
1.2 Removing and installing the spray nozzles for windscreen washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
1.3 Repairing washer fluid lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
2 Windscreen wiper and washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
2.1 Removing and installing the wiper arms with wiper blades and setting their final setting . . 126
2.2 Removing and installing wiper motor with linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
2.3 Removing and installing windscreen wiper motor from linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
2.4 Removing and installing sensor for rain and light detection G397 , vehicles up to CW
21.2015 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
2.5 Removing and installing sensor for rain and light detection G397 , vehicles from CW
22.2015 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
3 Rear window wiper and washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
3.1 Removing and installing the wiper arm with wiper blade and setting its final setting . . . . . . 134
3.2 Removing and installing windscreen wiper motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
3.3 Replacing and adjusting the spray nozzle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
4 Headlamp cleaning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
4.1 Removing and installing headlight cleaning system pump V11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
4.2 Removing and installing the lift cylinder for the headlight cleaning system . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
4.3 Bleed the headlamp cleaning systemCopying
Protected by copyright. . . . for
. .private
. . . .or.commercial
. . . . . . purposes,
. . . . . .in.part
. . or. .in.whole,
. . . .is.not
. .permitted
....... 138
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability

94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

1 Headlights – halogen headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Contents iii
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

1.1 Summary of components, halogen headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

1.2 Removing and installing headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
1.3 Removing and installing bulb “H7” for low beam lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
1.4 Remove and install “H15” bulbs for daytime running lights and high beam . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
1.5 Removing and installing the bulb for main beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
1.6 Removing and installing the side light bulb “W5W” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
1.7 Removing and installing the light bulb for the turn signal light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
1.8 Removing and installing headlight range control motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
1.9 Replace headlight fixing brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
1.10 Removing and installing LED module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
1.11 Change headlight for right-hand and/or left-hand traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
1.12 Setting the headlight beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
2 Headlights with Xenon discharge lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
2.1 Summary of components, headlights with Xenon discharge lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
2.2 Removing and installing headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
2.3 Replacing light bulbs and gas discharge lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
2.4 Replace attachment brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
2.5 Removing and installing headlight range control motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
2.6 Removing and installing the power output module for headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
2.7 Removing and installing LED module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
2.8 Change headlight for right-hand and/or left-hand traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
2.9 Setting the headlight beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
3 FULL-LED headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
3.1 Summary unlessof components
authorised by ŠKODA -AUTO
FULL-LED
A. S. ŠKODAheadlights
AUTO A. S. does.not
. .guarantee
. . . . . or. .accept
. . . any
. . liability
................. 171
3.2 Removing and installing the power output module for headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
173
3.3 Removing and installing LED module for daytime running, parking and turn signal light . . 173
3.4 Installing repair kit for headlight housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
3.5 Removing and installing the control motor for headlamp range control V48 / V49 . . . . . . 175
3.6 Setting the headlight beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
3.7 Change headlight for right-hand and/or left-hand traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
4 Automatic headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
4.1 Vehicle level sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
4.2 Removing and installing the headlamp range control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
5 Side turn signal in the wing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
5.1 Removing and installing side turn signal in the wing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
6 Lights in the exterior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
6.1 Removing and installing the turn signal light in the exterior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
6.2 Removing and installing signal bulb in exterior mirror L131 / L132 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
7 Tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
7.1 Tail lights, vehicles manufactured up to CW 50.2019 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
7.2 Tail lights, vehicles manufactured from CW 51.2019 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
8 Registration number lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
8.1 Removing and installing licence plate carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
8.2 Replacing bulb for the number plate light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
9 Additional brake light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
9.1 Removing and installing high level brake light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
10 Fog lights, fog lights with “Corner” function and daylight driving light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
10.1 Removing and installing the fog lights, vehicles manufactured until CW 50.2019 . . . . . . . . 192
10.2 Removing and installing fog lights, vehicles manufactured from CW 51.2019. . . . . . . . . . . 193
10.3 Adjusting the fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
10.4 Replacing light bulb for fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
11 Entry and start authorisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
11.1 Installation overview - entry and start authorisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
11.2 Install and remove interior aerial 1 for entry and start system R138 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

iv Contents
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

11.3 Install and remove aerial in luggage compartment for entry and start system R137 . . . . 197
11.4 Install and remove aerial in rear bumper for entry and start system R136 . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
11.5 Control unit for keyless entry authorisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
11.6 Connection assignment of the connector on the control unit for keyless entry authorisation
........................................................................ 199
12 Switch unit on the steering column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
12.1 Assembly overview - switch unit on the steering column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
12.2 Removing and installing steering column combination switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
12.3 Removing and installing return ring with slip ring from steering column combination switch
........................................................................ 206
12.4 Adjusting centre position for return ring with slip ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
12.5 Removing and installing steering lock housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
12.6 Removing and installing lock cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
12.7 Removing and installing ignition/starter switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
12.8 Contact assignment on the ignition starter switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
12.9 Removing and installing ignition key anti-removal lock solenoid N376 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
13 Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
13.1 Assembly overview - parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
13.2 Removing and installing the parking aid control unit J446 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
13.3 Removing and installing the rear parking aid warning buzzer H15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
13.4 Removing and installing the front parking aid warning buzzer H22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
13.5 Removing and installing rear parking aid senders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
13.6 Removing and installing front parking aid sender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
13.7 Parking aid sender holder - assignment, fitting location, gluing procedure, drilling of holes
........................................................................ 218
13.8 Self-diagnosis of the parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
14 Reversing camera system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
14.1 General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
14.2 Overview of components - Reversing camera system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
14.3 Removing and installing handle with rear view camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
14.4 Removing and installing the rear view camera spray nozzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

96 - Lights, bulbs, switches - interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

1 Interior lights and warning light for front passenger airbag deactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
1.1 Removing and installing the front interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
1.2 Removing and installing the rear interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
1.3 Removing and installing the rear interior light on the left and right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
1.4 Removing and installing glove box light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
1.5 Removing and installing the light for the storage bag in the front door trim . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
1.6 Removing and installing the front footwell light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
1.7 Removing and installing the centre console glove compartment light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
1.8 Removing and installing luggage compartment light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
1.9 Removing and installing the warning light for front passenger airbag switch-off function . . 228
2 Switches on the dash panel, in the centre console, in the doors and in the roof cover . . . . 230
2.1 Removing and installing light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
2.2 Removing and installing the headlight range control adjuster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
2.3 Removing and installing the switch for daylight driving light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
2.4 Removing and installing switches in centre console of the dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
231
2.5
unless authorisedRemoving
by ŠKODA AUTO andA. installing
S. ŠKODA AUTO theA.glove box
S. does not light switch
guarantee or accept any.liability
............................. 232
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
2.6 Removing and installing hazard warning lights button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
2.7 Removing and installing the mirror adjustment switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
2.8 Removing and installing the switch for the power window lifter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
2.9 Removing and installing starter button E408 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
2.10 Removing and installing the interior monitoring deactivation button as well as the towing
protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
2.11 Removing an installing the push-button for tyre pressure inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

Contents v
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

2.12 Removing and installing the rear seat heating switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
3 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
3.1 Removing and installing horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
4 Anti-theft warning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
4.1 General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
4.2 Removing and installing the horn H12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
4.3 Removing and installing interior monitoring sensor G273 and vehicle inclination sender G384
...................................................................... 240
4.4 Removing and installing the interior monitoring deactivation button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
5 12V power sockets, cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
6 Immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
6.1 General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
6.2 Immobiliser control unit J362 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
6.3 Ignition key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
6.4 New identity when changing all the components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
6.5 System test result (online connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

97 - Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
1 Fuse holder and relay carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
1.1 Removing and installing fuse holder from dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
1.2 Removing and installing the E-box in engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
1.3 Removing and installing relay and fuse holder behind dash panel on the driver's side . . . . 249
1.4 Removing and installing the relay of the relay carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
2 Control units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
2.1 Onboard supply control unit J519 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
2.2 Removing and installing data bus diagnostic interface J533 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
3 Vehicle diagnosis, testing and information systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
4 Wiring harness and plug repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
5 Use contact surface cleaning set VAS 6410 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

vi Contents
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

00 – Technical data
1 Safety instructions
(SRL001521; Edition 12.2019)
⇒ “1.1 Safety precautions when working on vehicles with start-
stop system”, page 1
⇒ “1.2 Safety precautions during road tests in which testing and
measuring equipment is used”, page 1
⇒ “1.3 Use and safety instructions for gas discharge lamps”, page
1

1.1 Safety precautions when working on ve‐

hicles with start-stop system
When working on vehicles with start/stop system, please observe
the following:

Caution
Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
Risk of injury from automatic engine start.
♦ On vehicles with activated start-stop system (recogniza‐
ble by a message in the dash panel insert) there is a risk
that the engine can start automatically.
♦ It is therefore necessary to ensure that the start-stop sys‐
tem is deactivated when carrying out work on the vehicle
(switch ignition off, if required switch ignition on again).

1.2 Safety precautions during road tests in

which testing and measuring equipment
is used
Note the following if testers and measuring instruments are used
during road tests:

WARNING

There is a risk of accident from insufficient securing of testers

and measuring instruments.
There is a hazard from the release of the passenger airbag in
the event of an accident.
• Drivers operating testing and measuring equipment while
driving can lead to an accident.
• Increased risk of accident due to unsecured test and
measuring devices.
Always secure the testing and measuring equipment with a belt
on the rear seat and have a second person operate them there.

1.3 Use and safety instructions for gas dis‐

charge lamps
All other notes and comments to this chapter can be found in the
Workshop Manual “Electrical System- General Notes” ⇒ Electri‐
cal System- General Notes; Rep. gr. 94 Chapter “94”. If a note

1. Safety instructions 1
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

cannot be accessed, open the Workshop Manual “Electrical Sys‐

tem - General Notes” manually in “ELSA”.

2 Rep. gr.00 - Technical data

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

2 Repair instructions
⇒ “2.1 Contact corrosion”, page 3
⇒ “2.2 Cable routing and securing”, page 3

2.1 Contact corrosion

The use of unsuitable connection elements (screws, nuts, wash‐
ers, etc.) causes contact corrosion.
This is why only connection elements with a special surface coat‐
ings are fitted.
Therefore, the rubber or plastic parts and the adhesives are made
from electrically non-conductive materials.
In case of doubt regarding the re-use of certain parts, the use of
new parts is recommended.

WARNING

♦ It is recommended to use only original connection material

as well as spare parts which are tested and compatible
with aluminium, see ⇒ Electronic Catalogue of Original
Parts “ETKA” .
♦ It is recommended to use only Škoda accessories.
♦ Any damage resulting from contact corrosion is not cov‐
ered by the terms of the warranty.

2.2 Cable routing and securing

Caution

Risk of damage to cables, risk of fire and failure of onboard

electrical system!
♦ To rule out mix ups and ensure the original fitting position,
mark the lines before disassembly. This includes lines for
fuel, hydraulics, under pressure, activated charcoal filter,
or electric cables. Make photos or sketches where nec‐
essary.
♦ To prevent damage to lines, sufficient clearance from all
moving or hot components must be ensured in the engine
compartment due to its cramped construction.
♦ All plug connections must be locked using catches, if nec‐
essary with special securing clips, to prevent them dis‐
connecting unintentionally. When connecting, the catches
must engage audibly; for plug connections with
Protected catch, Copying
by copyright. lock for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
the plug connection by pushing in the catch. If necessary,
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
check it is locked correctly by pulling gently on the plug
connection.

Example of a connector catch with special securing clip -1-

Primary voltage supply in the relay and fuse carrier under the
dash panel:

2. Repair instructions 3
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

Note

After inserting the plug up to the stop -2- to terminal 30+ on the
relay and fuse carrier -3-, secure the plug connection by pushing
the securing clip -1- in -direction of arrow- up to the stop!

4 Rep. gr.00 - Technical data

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

3 Battery
⇒ “3.1 Warning instructions and safety precautions when working
on the battery”, page 5
⇒ “3.2 Battery types”, page 5

3.1 Warning instructions and safety precau‐

tions when working on the battery
All the notes and comments for this chapter can be found in the
Workshop Manual ⇒ Electrical System - General notes; Rep. gr.
27 . If a note cannot be accessed, open the Workshop Manual
“Electrical System - General Notes” manually in “ELSA”, Section
“27”.

3.2 Battery types

WARNING

When working on the battery wear proper protection and ob‐

serve safety precautions (see “Electrical System - General
notes” ⇒ Electrical System - General notes; Rep. gr. 27 Sec‐
tion “27”). If a note cannot be accessed, open the Workshop
Manual “Electrical System - General Notes” manually in “EL‐
SA”.

Batteries with a magic eye and plugs covered in adhesive tape

are factory-installed in all vehicles (except vehicles with start-stop
system).
In vehicles with start/stop system, (depending on types of engines
see ⇒ Electronic Catalogue of Original Parts“ETKA” ), a fleece
battery (AGM) or a battery with magic eye with EFB technology
(Enhanced Flooded Battery) is installed.
Description of the function, test and maintenance of the previous
batteries see “Electrical System – Generalunless
notes” ⇒ Electrical
Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
System – General notes; Rep. gr. 27 . If a note cannot
with respect to thebe ac‐ of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
correctness
cessed, open the Workshop Manual “Electrical System - General
Notes” manually in “ELSA”.

3. Battery 5
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

27 – Starter, current supply, CCS

1 Battery
⇒ “1.1 Assembly overview - battery”, page 6
⇒ “1.2 Summary of components - battery isolation”, page 10
⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10
⇒ “1.4 Checking battery”, page 13
⇒ “1.5 Charging battery”, page 13
⇒ “1.6 Removing and installing battery”, page 13
⇒ “1.7 Removing and installing earth lead with battery monitoring
control unit J367 ”, page 18
⇒ “1.8 Removing and installing battery isolation”, page 19
⇒ “1.9 Battery parameterisation”, page 20
⇒ “1.10 Removing and installing battery tray ”, page 21

WARNING

When working on the battery wear proper protection and ob‐

serve safety precautions (see ⇒ Electrical System - General
notes; Rep. gr. 27 ). If a note cannot be accessed, open the
Workshop Manual “Electrical System - General Notes” man‐
ually in “ELSA”, Chapter “27”.

1.1 Assembly overview - battery

⇒ “1.1.1 Summary of components - battery in engine compart‐
ment”, page 6
⇒ “1.1.2 Summary of components - battery in luggage compart‐
ment”, page 8
Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
1.1.1 Summary ofcorrectness
with respect to the componentsof information in- this
battery in engine
document. Copyright by ŠKODAcompartment
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
AUTO A. S.

6 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

1 - Collar
2 - Nut
❑ 6 Nm
3 - Battery-cable terminal
❑ Earth lead
❑ Disconnecting and con‐
necting the battery
⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting
and reconnecting bat‐
tery”, page 10
4 - Cap
5 - Earth lead
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “1.7.1 Removing and
installing earth lead with
battery monitoring con‐
trol unit J367 - battery in
engine compartment”,
page 18
On vehicles with start-stop
system:
❑ with battery monitoring
control unit - J367-
❑Protected
Battery parameterisa‐
by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
tion
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
⇒ respect
with “1.9 Battery parame‐
to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
terisation”, page 20
6 - Electrical plug connection
On vehicles with start-stop
system:
❑ Battery monitor control
unit - J367-
❑ Follow the steps for dis‐
connecting and connecting the battery ⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10
7 - Nut
❑ 15 Nm
8 - Battery
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “1.6 Removing and installing battery”, page 13
❑ Disconnecting and reconnecting ⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10
❑ Check ⇒ “1.4 Checking battery”, page 13 .
❑ Charge ⇒ “1.5 Charging battery”, page 13
9 - Screw
❑ 15 Nm
10 - Battery carrier
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “1.10.1 Removing and installing the battery tray in the engine compartment”, page 21
11 - Screw
❑ 20 Nm
12 - Retaining clip
13 - Water drain hose
❑ not fitted to all battery trays
❑ When installing, guide the hose without kinking it

1. Battery 7
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

14 - Nut
❑ 15 Nm
15 - Battery-cable terminal
❑ for plus terminal
❑ Disconnecting and connecting the battery ⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10
16 - Plus terminal

1.1.2 Summary of components - battery in luggage compartment

1 - Retaining clip
2 - Screws
❑ 4 pieces
❑ 18 Nm
3 - Cover
❑ for negative pole
4 - Protective collar
5 - Fuse holder A - SA-
❑ Disconnecting and re‐ Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
connecting unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
and reconnecting bat‐
tery”, page 10
❑ with battery isolation
❑ Removing and installing
battery isolation
⇒ “1.8 Removing and in‐
stalling battery isola‐
tion”, page 19
6 - Screw
7 - Nut
❑ 6 Nm
8 - Earth lead
❑ with battery monitoring
control unit - J367-
❑ Disconnecting and re‐
connecting
⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting
and reconnecting bat‐
tery”, page 10
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “1.7.2 Removing and
installing earth lead with battery monitoring control unit J367 - battery in luggage compartment”,
page 18
9 - Screw
10 - Nut
❑ 20 Nm
11 - Hose
❑ for central degassing
12 - Washer
❑ of the hose for central degassing

8 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

13 - Adjustment link
14 - Battery carrier
❑ glued into the spare wheel well
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “1.10.2 Removing and installing the battery tray in the luggage compartment”, page 21
15 - Screw
❑ 18 Nm
16 - Screws
❑ 3 pieces
❑ 18 Nm
17 - Battery carrier
❑ glued into the spare wheel well
18 - Battery - A-
19 - Nut
❑ 6 Nm
20 - Cover
❑ for positive pole

1. Battery 9
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

1.2 Summary of components - battery isolation

1 - Fuse holder A - SA-

2 - Battery isolation
3 - Nut
❑ 10 Nm
4 - Connector

1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery

Disconnect battery

WARNING

Observe the battery handling instructions

Protected as well
by copyright. Copying as the
for private warn‐ purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
or commercial
ing instructions and safety precautions
unless for lead
authorised by ŠKODA AUTO acid batteries
A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
⇒ “3.1 Warning instructionswith
and safety
respect to theprecautions when inwork‐
correctness of information this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
ing on the battery”, page 5 .

– Switch off all electrical components and take out the ignition
key.
Battery in engine compartment:

10 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Loosen nut -2- and disconnect pole terminal -4- from the neg‐
ative terminal of the battery.

Note

If both terminals are disconnected, only then disconnect pole ter‐

minal (-) from battery earth.

Battery in luggage compartment:

– Raise the luggage compartment floor and attach it to the body.

– Open the cover -3- above the negative terminal of the battery.
– Loosen nut -1- and disconnect pole terminal -2- from the neg‐
ative terminal of the battery.
Reconnecting battery

WARNING

Please observe the following additional instructions after work‐

ing on the airbag
Protectedsystem orCopying
by copyright. on theforbelt tighteners
private or commercial or the safety
purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
belts: unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
♦ Switch on the ignition before connecting the battery.
♦ Nobody should be in the vehicle when the battery is being
connected.

Note

♦ Neither grease nor oil the battery terminals.

♦ The battery pole terminals must only be fitted by hand without
using any force in order to avoid damaging the battery hous‐
ing.
♦ Install the battery pole terminals in such a way that the battery
pole with the terminal is on the same level or protrudes.
♦ If both terminals are disconnected, only then disconnect the
battery positive pole terminal (+).
♦ After connecting the battery and switching on the ignition, the
warning light for the stability program TCS/ESP and the warn‐
ing light for the power-assisted steering remain lit. The warning
lights go out automatically after driving a few metres forward.
Thereby the steering angle sender - G85- is activated again.

Vehicles with battery monitoring control unit - J367- (with start-

stop system)

1. Battery 11
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Disconnect the plug -3- from the control unit -2- before con‐
necting to the battery.
– Fit pole terminal (-) with control unit onto the “-” pol of the bat‐
tery and tighten the fixing nut -1-.
– Fit the plug -3- again onto the control unit.
Vehicles without battery monitoring control unit - J367-

– Fit pole terminal of the earth line onto the battery negative ter‐
minal and tighten the nut -arrow-.
Continued for all vehicles:
When the battery is reconnected, perform the following opera‐
tions depending on the vehicle equipment:
♦ Set clock.
♦ Check the power windows ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet Rapid .
♦ Code radio/navigation with anti-theft coding (not valid for radio
systems/navigation systems mounted at factory, see
⇒ “1.2 Electronic anti-theft coding”, page 61 ).
♦ Connect the ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester, query the event mem‐
ory and delete any event memory entries.
Tightening torques
All types of pole terminals 6 Nm

12 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

1.4 Checking battery

All the notes and comments for this chapter can be found in the
Workshop Manual ⇒ Electrical System - General notes; Rep. gr.
27 . If a note cannot be accessed, open the Workshop Manual
“Electrical System - General Notes” manually in “ELSA”, Section
“27”.

1.5 Charging battery

1.6 Removing and installing battery

⇒ “1.6.1 Removing and installing the battery in the engine com‐
partment”, page 13
⇒ “1.6.2 Removing and installing the battery in the luggage com‐
partment”, page 15

1.6.1 Removing and installing the battery in

the engine compartment

WARNING

Observe the battery handling instructions as well as the warn‐

ing instructions and safety precautions for lead acid batteries
⇒ “3.1 Warning instructions and safety precautions when work‐
ing on the battery”, page 5 .

Removing
– Disconnect the battery earth strap -4-
⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10 .
– Fold open the cover -3- and slacken the nut of the positive
terminal -2-.
– Vehicles with a main fuse box - slightly press down the catches
one after the other using a screwdriver, then release by tilting
the screwdriver in direction of arrow -A- and fold the fuse box
with the positive terminal -1- to the side in direction of arrow
-B-.

1. Battery 13
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Unscrew bolt -1-.

– Remove mounting bracket -2-.
– Take battery -3- out of battery tray -4-.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:

– Insert battery in such a way that the rear battery foot strip
catches below the pegs of the battery tray -arrows-.

14 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– The battery is properly installed when the middle recess of the

front battery foot strip is aligned at the bottom with the bore in
the battery tray -arrows-.
– For batteries with hose for the central degassing, make sure
that the hose is not disconnected. Only then can the battery
degasify.
– For batteries without hose for the central degassing, make
sure that the opening on the battery lid is not clogged.
– Check that the battery is sitting firmly after installation.

Caution

There are certain dangers if the battery is incorrectly mounted

or mounted loosely:
♦ Shortened service life due to damage from vibration (dan‐
ger of explosion).
♦ Damage to the grid plates of the battery.
♦ Damage to battery housing by securing bracket (possibil‐
ity of acid leaking, with high consequential costs)
♦ Poor crash safety.

– Lay the positive cable between the battery tray and the battery.
Vehicles with start-stop system

Note

When replacing the battery monitoring control unit - J367- , adapt

the battery monitoring control unit - J367-
⇒ “1.9 Battery parameterisation”, page 20 .

Tightening torques
♦ ⇒ “1.1.1 Summary of components - battery in engine com‐
partment”, page 6

1.6.2 Removing and installing the battery in

the luggage compartment

WARNING Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
Observe the battery handling instructions as well as the warn‐
ing instructions and safety precautions for lead acid batteries
⇒ “3.1 Warning instructions and safety precautions when work‐
ing on the battery”, page 5 .

Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Raise the luggage compartment floor and attach it to the body.
– Remove boxes with tool kit and vehicle equipment.

1. Battery 15
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Unscrew the screws -arrows- and remove the retaining clip

-1-.

16 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Detach and remove cover -7- for battery negative terminal

-arrows-.
– Loosen nut -2- and disconnect pole terminal -5- from the neg‐
ative terminal of the battery.
– Remove the positive terminal cover -1-.
– Loosen nut -4- and disconnect pole terminal -3- with fuse hold‐
er from the battery positive terminal.
– Disconnect hose -6- for central degassing.
– Unscrew screw -8- and remove securing bracket -9-.
– If present, remove battery's protective cover.
– Remove battery from the luggage compartment.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– For batteries with hose for the central degassing, make sure
that the hose is not disconnected. Only then can the battery
degasify.
– Check that the battery is sitting firmly after installation.

Caution

There are certain dangers if the battery is incorrectly mounted

Vehicles with start-stop system

Note

When replacing the battery monitoring control unit - J367- , adapt

the battery monitoring control unit - J367-
Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
⇒ “1.9 Battery parameterisation”, page 20 .
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

Tightening torques
♦ ⇒ “1.1.2 Summary of components - battery in luggage com‐
partment”, page 8

1. Battery 17
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

1.7 Removing and installing earth lead with

battery monitoring control unit - J367-
⇒ “1.7.1 Removing and installing earth lead with battery monitor‐
ing control unit J367 - battery in engine compartment”,
page 18
⇒ “1.7.2 Removing and installing earth lead with battery monitor‐
ing control unit J367 - battery in luggage compartment”,
page 18

1.7.1 Removing and installing earth lead with

battery monitoring control unit - J367- -
battery in engine compartment
Removing
– Switch off all electrical components and take out the ignition
key.
– Undo nuts -1- and remove the pole terminal with the control
unit -3- from the battery-cable terminal.
– Disconnect connector -2-.

– Unscrew the nuts -2- and remove the earth cable -1- with bat‐
tery monitoring control unit - J367- .
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– Follow the work procedure when connecting the battery
⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10 .
– Adapt the battery monitoring control unit - J367-
⇒ “1.9 Battery parameterisation”, page 20 .
Tightening torques
♦ ⇒ “1.1.1 Summary of components - battery in engine com‐
partment”, page 6

1.7.2 Removing and installing earth lead with

battery monitoring control unit - J367- -
battery in luggage compartment
Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
Removing unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

Note

Cable straps should be fastened again in the same place when

installing.

– Switch off all electrical components and take out the ignition
key.

18 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Raise the luggage compartment floor and attach it to the body.

– Remove boxes with tool kit and vehicle equipment.
– Open the cover -3- above the negative terminal of the battery.
– Loosen nut and disconnect pole terminal -6- from the negative
terminal of the battery.
– Disconnect plug connection -7-.
– Cut cable straps -1-.
– Install earth lead -arrow-.
– Unscrew the nuts -5- and remove the earth cable -4- with bat‐
tery monitoring control unit - J367- .
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– Connecting battery
⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10 .
– Adapt the battery monitoring control unit - J367-
⇒ “1.9 Battery parameterisation”, page 20 .
Tightening torques
♦ ⇒ “1.1.2 Summary of components - battery in luggage com‐
partment”, page 8

1.8 Removing and installing battery

AUTO A. isola‐
Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised by ŠKODA S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability

tion
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

WARNING

Observe the battery handling instructions as well as the warn‐

ing instructions and safety precautions for lead acid batteries
⇒ “3.1 Warning instructions and safety precautions when work‐
ing on the battery”, page 5 .

Removing
– Switch off all electrical components and take out the ignition
key.
– Raise the luggage compartment floor and attach it to the body.
– Remove boxes with tool kit and vehicle equipment.
– Disconnect battery
⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10

1. Battery 19
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Remove connector -2-.

– Remove nuts -1- and remove battery isolation-4- from fuse
holder A - SA- ..
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– Connecting battery
⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10 .
Tightening torques
♦ ⇒ “1.1.2 Summary of components - battery in luggage com‐
partment”, page 8
♦ ⇒ “1.2 Summary of components - battery isolation”, page 10

1.9 Battery parameterisation

It is performed on vehicles with a start-stop system when replac‐
ing the battery with a new one of another type or with higher
capacity.
After a new start battery is installed and the battery has been par‐
ametrised, the technical data of the new battery are sent to the
battery monitoring control unit - J367- .
– ⇒ VehicleProtected
diagnostic tester
by copyright. connect
Copying and
for private select the
or commercial operating
purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
mode “Targeted fault-finding”.
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

– Select the “Selected Functions/Components” and subse‐

quently the following menu points using the button “Skip”:
Version 1 (older model years):
♦ Body
♦ Electrical system
♦ Diagnostic capable systems
♦ Checking battery
♦ Battery monitoring function
♦ Adaption battery parameterisation
Version 2 (recent model years):
Body
Electrical system
Systems capable of diagnostics
0019 - Data bus diagnostic interface - J533-
0019 - Data bus diagnostic interface - J533- function
19 - Adapt battery

20 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

1.10 Removing and installing battery tray

⇒ “1.10.1 Removing and installing the battery tray in the engine
compartment”, page 21
⇒ “1.10.2 Removing and installing the battery tray in the luggage
compartment”, page 21

1.10.1 Removing and installing the battery tray

in the engine compartment
Removing
– Remove the battery
⇒ “1.6 Removing and installing battery”, page 13 .
– Vehicles with start-stop system - slacken and remove the cov‐
er -1-, if present, by releasing -arrows- from the battery tray
-2-.
– Vehicles with the automatic gearbox control unit fitted to the
battery tray - remove automatic gearbox control unit ⇒ Gear‐
box; Rep. gr. 37 .

Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
– Unscrew screws -4- -3- and nuts -1-.
– Slightly rotate the air filter housing -2- (depending on the
equipment).
– Raise the batter tray -5- and detach water drain hose (if
present), if necessary remove tray together with water drain
hose.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.
Tightening torques
♦ ⇒ “1.1.1 Summary of components - battery in engine com‐
partment”, page 6

1.10.2 Removing and installing the battery tray

in the luggage compartment
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Separating device for glued windows - V.A.G 1474A- or sep‐
arating device for glued windows - VAS 6452-

1. Battery 21
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

♦ Cutting tool - V.A.G 1351-

♦ Hand pressure gun - V.A.G 1628-

♦ Cartridge heater - V.A.G 1939-

Removing
– Remove the battery
⇒ “1.6.2 Removing and installing the battery in the luggage
compartment”, page 15 .
– Pull the cutting thread through the adhesive sealant to the in‐
side using a tool from the window adhesive set.
– Similarly guide the other end of the cutting thread through the
adhesive sealant to the inside, at the edge of the battery tray.
– Attach the mounts to the ends of the cutting thread.
– Press the cutting thread against the battery tray with the
wedge while cutting free to ensure clearance to the spare
wheel well.
– Cut out the battery tray in stages in this way.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:

22 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

WARNING

Do not prime the adhesive surface and do not treat with clean‐
ing solution. Keep the adhesive surfaces free of dirt or grease.
The activator must not come into contact with paintwork, oth‐
erwise there will be paint damage.
Do not prime the adhesive surface you have just cut with acti‐
vator or treat it with cleaning solution.

– Cut back the remaining material on the spare wheel well using
the U-shaped cutting knife, but do not remove completely.

Note

The remaining material serves as holding primer for the newly

applied adhesive sealing material. Keep the adhesive surfaces
free of dirt or grease.

WARNING

Exception: if the bonding is carried out later than one day after
cutting back the adhesive bead, the remaining material must
be activated with the activator.
The activator is applied evenly in one go with the applicator.
Activator must not come into contact with the paint, as this will
damage the paint.
Drying time: approx. 10 min. Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

– Glue on the battery tray with window pane adhesive ⇒ Elec‐

tronic Catalogue of Original Parts“ETKA”
– Install the battery
⇒ “1.6.2 Removing and installing the battery in the luggage
compartment”, page 15 .

1. Battery 23
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

2 Jump start point

⇒ “2.1 Summary of components - jump start point”, page 24
⇒ “2.2 Removing and installing jump start point”, page 24

2.1 Summary of components - jump start point

1 - Support
❑ for jump start point and
air filter housing
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “2.2 Removing and in‐
stalling jump start point”,
page 24
2 - Nut
❑ 2 pieces
❑ 20 Nm
3 - Plus terminal
4 - Nut
❑ 20 Nm
5 - Cap
6 - Connecting bar
❑ for positive cables
7 - Nut
❑ 10 Nm
8 - Plus terminal
❑ to E-box
9 - Screw
❑ 10 Nm
10 - E box
11 - Side panel
12 - Earth tap
❑ 20 Nm Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
13 - Cover with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

for positive tap

14 - Positive tap
❑ 20 Nm
15 - Plus terminal
❑ To starter
16 - Screw
❑ 20 Nm

2.2 Removing and installing jump start point

Removing
– Disconnect battery
⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10 .

24 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Remove the air filter housing ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 24 .

– Release catches -arrows- and remove cover -1-.

– Unscrew and detach positive tap -6-.

– Disconnect electrical cable -7- and move clear.
– Release cap -2-.
– Unscrew nuts -1- and -5-.
– Disconnect electrical cables -3- and -4- and move clear.

– Unscrew nuts -2-.

– Unscrew bolt -3-.
– Raise mount -1- and disconnect plug connections.
– Move clear the wiring harness and take out mount -1-.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– Connecting battery
⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10 .
Tightening torques Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
♦ ⇒ “2.1 Summary of components - jump start point”, page 24

2. Jump start point 25

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

3 Starter
⇒ “3.1 Assembly overview: starter”, page 26
⇒ “3.2 Removing and installing starter”, page 30
⇒ “3.3 Checking starter”, page 37

3.1 Assembly overview: starter

⇒ “3.1.1 Assembly overview - starter, vehicles with 5-speed man‐
ual gearbox MQ200-5F”, page 26
⇒ “3.1.2 Assembly overview - starter, vehicles with 5-speed man‐
ual gearbox MQ250-5F”, page 27
⇒ “3.1.3 Assembly overview - starter, vehicles with 6-speed man‐
ual gearbox 02U (MQ200-6F)”, page 28
⇒ “3.1.4 Starter, vehicles with 7-speed automatic gearbox 0CW
(DQ200-7F)”, page 29

3.1.1 Assembly overview - starter, vehicles with 5-speed manual gearbox

MQ200-5F

1 - Starter
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “3.2.1 Removing and
installing the starter, ve‐
hicles with 5-speed
manual gearbox
(MQ200-5F)”,
page 30
❑ Check
⇒ “3.3 Checking start‐
er”, page 37 .
2 - Line 30/B+
3 - Nut
❑ 20 Nm
4 - Screw
❑ 2 pieces
❑ 80 Nm
5 - Protective cap
6 - Fixing nut for line holder
❑ 20 Nm

26 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

3.1.2 Assembly overview - starter, vehicles with 5-speed manual gearbox

MQ250-5F

1 - Starter
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “3.2.2 Removing and
installing the starter, ve‐
hicles with 5-speed
manual gearbox
(MQ250-5F)”,
page 32
❑ Check
⇒ “3.3 Checking start‐
er”, page 37 .
2 - Screw
❑ 2 pieces
❑ 80 Nm
3 - Earth lead
❑ Depends on equipment
Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
4 - Nut
❑ Depends on equipment
❑ 20 Nm
5 - Connector
6 - Nut
❑ 2 pieces
❑ 20 Nm
7 - Cap
8 - Line 30/B+
9 - Nut
❑ Depends on equipment
❑ 20 Nm
10 - Earth lead
❑ Depends on equipment
11 - bracket for wire harness

3. Starter 27
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

3.1.3 Assembly overview - starter, vehicles with 6-speed manual gearbox 02U
(MQ200-6F)

1 - Starter
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “3.2.3 Removing and
installing the starter, ve‐
hicles with 6-speed
manual gearbox
(MQ200-6F)”,
page 34
❑ Check
⇒ “3.3 Checking start‐
er”, page 37 .
2 - Screw
❑ 2 pieces
❑ 80 Nm
3 - Connector
4 - Line 30/B+
5 - Nut
❑ 20 Nm
6 - Cap
7 - bracket for wire harness
8 - Nut
❑ 20 Nm

28 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

3.1.4 Starter, vehicles with 7-speed automatic gearbox 0CW (DQ200-7F)

1 - Starter
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “3.2.4 Removing and
installing the starter - ve‐
hicles with automatic
gearbox”, page 36
❑ Check
⇒ “3.3 Checking start‐
er”, page 37 .
2 - Screw
❑ 80 Nm
3 - Earth lead
❑ Depends on equipment
4 - Nut
❑ Depends on equipment
❑ 20 Nm
5 - Connector
6 - Nut
❑ 20 Nm
7 - Cap
8 - Line 30/B+
9 - Screw Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
❑ 80 Nm with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

3. Starter 29
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

3.2 Removing and installing starter

⇒ “3.2.1 Removing and installing the starter, vehicles with 5-
speed manual gearbox (MQ200-5F)”, page 30
⇒ “3.2.2 Removing and installing the starter, vehicles with 5-
speed manual gearbox (MQ250-5F)”, page 32
⇒ “3.2.3 Removing and installing the starter, vehicles with 6-
speed manual gearbox (MQ200-6F)”, page 34
⇒ “3.2.4 Removing and installing the starter - vehicles with auto‐
matic gearbox”, page 36

3.2.1 Removing and installing the starter, ve‐

hicles with 5-speed manual gearbox
(MQ200-5F)

Note

♦ Due to the higher requirements on the starter when the start/

stop system is activated, e.g. in urban traffic/driving, its life has
been increased and the ring gear reinforced.
♦ When carrying out repairs, pay attention to the correct desig‐
nation of the spare parts (see ⇒ Electronic Catalogue of
Original Parts “ETKA” ). Components adapted to start/stop
system are not identified separately and are not or barely dif‐
ferent from normal components in their appearance.

Removing
– Disconnect battery earth strap
⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10 .
– Engage 5th gear.
1.2 l and 1.6 MPI engine
– Remove hose -2-.
– Remove screw -1- and release retaining lugs -arrows-.
1.2 TSI engine Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

– Remove air exhaust -1- and hose -2-.

Continue for all engines

30 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Unlock and pull off connector -1-.

– Pull off the plastic cap -2-, unscrew nuts, and remove line from
terminal 30.

– Unscrew the plug -arrow-.

– Remove noise insulation ⇒ Engine; Rep. gr. 66 .

– Unscrew the nut -arrow- and remove the bracket for the ca‐
bles.

3. Starter 31
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Unscrew screw -arrow- and take out the starter by moving it

downwards.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:

Note

Always use a new self-locking nut to attach the earth strap and
the positive cable (see ⇒ Electronic Catalogue of Original
Parts“ETKA” ).

Caution

In an incorrect cable/cable attachment to terminal B+ can

cause cable damage, a short-circuit and a vehicle fire.
The cable to terminal B+ must be laid and attached so that it
does not come into contact with rotating or moving parts of the
assembly (e.g. with the shift mechanism, with rotating parts of
the assembly etc.)!

Tightening torques
♦ ⇒ “3.1.1 Assembly overview - starter, vehicles with 5-speed
manual gearbox MQ200-5F”, page 26

3.2.2 Removing and installing the starter, ve‐

hicles with 5-speed manual gearbox
(MQ250-5F)

Note

♦ Due to the higher requirements on the starter when the start/

Removing
– Disconnect battery earth strap
⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10 .
Vehicles with
Protected TDI engine:
by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
– Remove airtofilter
with respect housing
the correctness ⇒ Engine;
of information in this Rep. gr.Copyright
document. 23 . by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
Continued for all engines:
– Remove noise insulation ⇒ Engine; Rep. gr. 66 .

32 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Disconnect connector -1-.

– Remove protective cap -2-.
– Unscrew nuts -3- and remove line 30/B+.

– Unscrew nuts -1- and remove earth cable -2- (if present).

3. Starter 33
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Unscrew nuts -4- and remove bracket -1- for wiring harness.
– Unscrew bolts -2- and -5- and remove the starter -3- by moving
it downwards.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:

Note

Always use a new self-locking nut to attach the earth strap and
the positive cable (see ⇒ Electronic Catalogue of Original
Parts“ETKA” ).

Caution

In an incorrect cable/cable attachment to terminal B+ can

Tightening torques Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
♦ ⇒ “3.1.2 Assembly overview - starter, vehicles
with respect with 5-speed
to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
manual gearbox MQ250-5F”, page 27

3.2.3 Removing and installing the starter, ve‐

hicles with 6-speed manual gearbox
(MQ200-6F)

Note

♦ Due to the higher requirements on the starter when the start/

Removing
– Disconnect battery earth strap
⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10 .
– Remove noise insulation ⇒ Engine; Rep. gr. 66 .

34 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Disconnect connector -1-.

– Unscrew cap -2-, unscrew nuts, and remove line 30/B+.

– Unscrew top screw -arrow-.

– Unscrew nuts -arrow- from the mounting bracket for wire har‐
ness.

3. Starter 35
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Screw out bottom fixing screw -arrow- and remove the starter
by moving it downwards.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:

Note

Always use a new self-locking nut to attach the earth strap and
the positive cable (see ⇒ Electronic Catalogue of Original
Parts“ETKA” ).

Caution

In an incorrect cable/cable attachment to terminal B+ can

Tightening torques
♦ ⇒ “3.1.3 Assembly overview - starter, vehicles with 6-speed
manual gearbox 02U (MQ200-6F)”, page 28

3.2.4 Removing and installing the starter - ve‐

hicles with automatic gearbox
Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

Note

♦ Due to the higher requirements on the starter when the start/

Removing
– Remove battery tray
⇒ “1.10.1 Removing and installing the battery tray in the en‐
gine compartment”, page 21 .
Vehicles with 1.4 l TDI engine:
– Remove air filter housing ⇒ Engine; Rep. gr. 23 .
Continued for all vehicles:

36 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Unscrew nuts -1- from the top screw and remove the earth
points -2- (if present).

– Remove connector -4-.

– Remove protective cap -5-.
– Unscrew nuts -6- and remove line 30/B+.
– Unscrew bolts -1- and -2- and remove the starter -3- by moving
it upwards.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:

Note
Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
Always use a new
with respect self-locking
to the nut to attach
correctness of information the earth
in this document. strap
Copyright and AUTO A. S.
by ŠKODA
the positive cable (see ⇒ Electronic Catalogue of Original
Parts“ETKA” ).

Caution

In an incorrect cable/cable attachment to terminal B+ can

Tightening torques
♦ ⇒ “3.1.4 Starter, vehicles with 7-speed automatic gearbox
0CW (DQ200-7F)”, page 29

3.3 Checking starter

Check starter ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester.

3. Starter 37
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

4 Alternator
⇒ “4.1 Removing and installing alternator”, page 38
⇒ “4.2 Fixing the B+ wire to the AC generator”, page 40
⇒ “4.3 Checking the carbon brushes of the AC generator”,
page 40
⇒ “4.4 Removing and installing voltage regulator”, page 41
⇒ “4.5 Removing and installing V-ribbed belt pulley on alternator”,
page 42

4.1 Removing and installing alternator

Note

When carrying out repairs, pay attention to the correct designation

of the spare parts (see ⇒ Electronic Catalogue of Original Parts
“ETKA” ). Components adapted to start/stop system are not iden‐
tified separately and are not or barely different from normal com‐
ponents in their appearance.

Removing
– Disconnect battery earth strap
⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10 .
– Remove the V-ribbed belt ⇒ Engine; Rep. gr. 13 .
Vehicles with 1.0/1.2/1.4 TSI and Common Rail engines:
– Remove noise insulation ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 50 .
– If an air conditioning system is installed, remove the AC com‐
pressor (do not open the refrigerant circuit) and secure to the
side so that the intake hoses are not excessively strained ⇒
Heating, Air Conditioning; Rep. gr. 87 .
– 1.0/1.4; 1.6 MPI; 1.6 TDI-CR engine - remove bracket with
tensioning pulley ⇒ Engine; Rep. gr. 13 .
– 1.2 TSI engine - remove guide pulley ⇒ Engine; Rep. gr. 13 .
1.6 TDI-CR engine:
– Unscrew screws -2- and -3- and push charge air cooler pump
- V188- to one side.
– Remove fan shroud ⇒ Engine; Rep. gr. 19 .
All vehicles:

38 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Remove the screen cap from the fixing nut of the B+ cable
-1-, unscrew the nut -2- and disconnect the electrical cable.
– Remove connector -3-.
– Unscrew the fixing nut for the cable holder, loosen the cable
retaining clip in required and put the cable to the side.

– Remove mounting screws -1- and -2- for generator -3-.

Vehicles with 1.0/1.2/1.4 TSI and Common Rail engines:
– Remove AC generator downwards.
Other vehicles:
– Remove AC generator upwards.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:

– For easier mounting move the threaded bushes -A- approx. 3

mm -arrows-.

Note

♦ Fix the B+ wire correctly to the AC generator

⇒ “4.2 Fixing the B+ wire to the AC generator”, page 40 .
♦ Pay attention to the work sequence when re-connecting the
battery
⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10 .

Tightening torques
Nut for line holder 3.2 Nm
Fixing screws of the AC generator 23 Nm

4. Alternator 39
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

4.2 Fixing the B+ wire to the AC generator

Caution

The screw connection for the B+ cable at the generator is iden‐

tified with B1+!
If the B+ cable is not tightened to the specified tightening tor‐
que, this may result in the following risks:
♦ The battery will not charge fully.
♦ Complete failure of vehicle electronics
♦ Spark formation may cause a fire
♦ Damage resulting from over voltage on electronic compo‐
nents and control units
The cable to terminal B+ must be laid and attached so that it
does not come into contact with rotating or moving parts of the
assembly (e.g. with the shift mechanism, with rotating parts of
the assembly etc.)!
In an incorrect cable/cable attachment to terminal B+ can
cause cable damage, a short-circuit and a vehicle fire.

Note

Always use a new self-locking nut for attaching the B+ cable

-arrow-, see ⇒ Electronic Catalogue of Original Parts “ETKA” .

Tightening torques
self-locking nuts for B+ line (-arrow-) 20 Nm

4.3 Checking the carbon brushes of the AC

generator
Length of carbon brushes when new = 12 mm
Wear limit = 5 mm
Tolerance of carbon brushes to each other = +1 mm

40 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

4.4 Removing and installing voltage regula‐

tor
⇒ “4.4.1 Removing and installing the Bosch voltage regulator”,
page 41
⇒ “4.4.2 Removing and installing the Valeo voltage regulator”,
page 41

4.4.1 Removing and installing the Bosch volt‐

age regulator
– Unscrew the fixing nuts arrows -A- and unscrew and remove
the fixing screw arrow -B- of the screen cap.
– Remove screen cap.

– Unscrew the fixing screws -arrows- of the voltage regulator

and remove voltage regulator.
– Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

4.4.2 Removing and installing the Valeo volt‐

age regulator
– Press off protective cap on unless
the rear side of the generator
Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
-arrows-. with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

4. Alternator 41
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Release screws -1- and nut -2-.

– Remove voltage regulator.
– Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

4.5 Removing and installing V-ribbed belt

pulley on alternator
⇒ “4.5.1 Removing and installing poly V-belt pulley without free‐
wheel on alternator”, page 42
⇒ “4.5.2 Removing and installing the V-ribbed belt pulley with free
wheel, manufacturer: Bosch”, page 43
⇒ “4.5.3 Removing and installing the V-ribbed belt pulley with free
wheel, manufacturer: Valeo”, page 44
⇒ “4.5.4 Removing and installing decoupler pulley ”, page 45

4.5.1 Removing and installing poly V-belt pul‐

ley without freewheel on alternator
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Socket - T30032-
Removing
– Remove alternator
⇒ “4.1 Removing and installing alternator”, page 38 .
– Clamp alternator in a vice at securing points.
Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
– Use socket - T30032- to unscrew poly V-beltunless
pulley securing
authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
nut from alternator shaft.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
Tightening torque
Nuts on V-ribbed belt pulley 65 Nm.

42 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

4.5.2 Removing and installing the V-ribbed

belt pulley with free wheel, manufactur‐
er: Bosch
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Polygon-head adapter - T10474-

♦ Socket drive with 8 mm hexagon socket or TORX T50

Removing
– Remove alternator
⇒ “4.1 Removing and installing alternator”, page 38 .
– Clamp alternator in a vice at securing points.
– Remove protective cap (where there is one) from poly V-belt
pulley with freewheel.
– Insert multipoint adapter - T10474- -1- by
Protected into polyCopying
copyright. V-beltforpulley
private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
and fit an open-end spanner (width
unless across
authorised flats 17 AUTO
by ŠKODA mm)A.toS. it.ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
– Insert hexagon socket or TORX socket -2- into alternator shaft.
– Turn generator shaft clockwise (left-handed thread) to loosen
it, counterholding it with the open-end spanner.
– Hold poly V-belt pulley with freewheel stationary with your
hand and turn alternator shaft until poly V-belt pulley with free‐
wheel can be removed.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
The torque wrench must be modified for assembly of poly V-belt
with freewheel as follows:

4. Alternator 43
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Release socket drive -1- and pull off grip -2-.

– Turn torque wrench grip -2- 180° and reinsert socket drive.
– Set turning direction of torque wrench to anti-clockwise at
socket drive.
– First screw V-ribbed belt pulley with freewheel onto alternator
shaft by hand as far as possible.
– Insert multipoint adapter - T10474- -1- into poly V-belt pulley
and fit an open-end spanner (width across flats 17 mm) to it.

– Insert hexagon socket or TORX socket -2- into alternator shaft.

– Turn alternator shaft anti-clockwise using the torque wrench
-3- in order to tighten poly V-belt pulley with freewheel.
Tightening torque
V-ribbed belt pulley 80 Nm.

4.5.3 Removing and installing the V-ribbed

belt pulley with free wheel, manufactur‐
er: Valeo
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Polygon-head adapter - T10474-

♦ Socket drive with 8 mm hexagon socket or TORX T50

Removing
Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
– unless
Remove alternator
authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
⇒ “4.1 Removing and installing alternator”, page 38 .
– Clamp alternator in a vice at securing points.
– Remove protective cap (where there is one) from poly V-belt
pulley with freewheel.

44 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Insert multipoint adapter - T10474- -1- into poly V-belt pulley

and fit an open-end spanner (width across flats 17 mm) to it.
– Insert hexagon socket or TORX socket -2- into alternator shaft.
– Turn generator shaft clockwise (left-handed thread) to loosen
it, counterholding it with the open-end spanner.
– Hold poly V-belt pulley with freewheel stationary with your
hand and turn alternator shaft until the poly V-belt pulley can
be removed.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
The torque wrench must be modified for assembly of poly V-belt
with freewheel as follows:

– Release socket drive -1- and pull off grip -2-.

– Insert hexagon socket or TORX socket -2- into alternator shaft.

– Turn alternator shaft anti-clockwise using the torque wrench
-3- in order to tighten poly V-belt pulley with freewheel.
Tightening torque
V-ribbed belt pulley 80 Nm.

4.5.4 Removing and installing “decoupler pul‐

ley”
General description
There are different variants of the decoupler pulley.

4. Alternator 45
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

Before removing, you must check which removal tool to use to

remove the installed decoupler pulley.

Note

♦ The length of the V-ribbed belt is different, depending on the

installed decoupler pulley with freewheel.
♦ Check the decoupler pulley with freewheel and ensure that the
correct poly V-belt is installed.
♦ For the correct poly V-belt, see the ⇒ Electronic Catalogue of
Original Parts“ETKA” .

Difference between the decouplers

A - Small decoupler pulley with freewheel – use the multipoint
adapter - T10474-
B - Large decoupler pulley with freewheel – use the multipoint
adapter - MP1-309 (3400)-

Special tools and workshop equipment required

♦ Polygon-head adapter - T10474-
♦ Polygon-head adapter - MP1-309 (3400)-
Removing
– Remove alternator
⇒ “4.1 Removing and installing alternator”, page 38 .
– Clamp alternator in a vice at securing points.
– Remove cap from the poly V-belt pulley.
– Insert multipoint adapter - T10474- -1- or multipoint adapter -
MP1-309 (3400)- into poly V-belt pulley and fit an open-end
spanner (width across flats 17 mm) to it.

46 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Insert hexagon socket or TORX socket -2- into alternator shaft.

– Turn generator shaft clockwise (left-handed thread) to loosen
it, counterholding it with the open-end spanner.
– Hold poly V-belt pulley stationary with your hand and turn al‐
ternator shaft until the poly V-belt pulley can be removed.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
The torque wrench must be modified as follows for assembly of
the poly V-belt:

– Release socket drive -1- and pull off grip -2-.

– Turn torque wrench grip -2- 180° and reinsert socket drive.
– Set turning direction of torque wrench to anti-clockwise at
socket drive.
– First screw poly V-belt pulley onto the alternator shaft by hand
as far as possible.
– Insert multipoint adapter
Protected by copyright. - T10474-
Copying for private oror multipoint
commercial adapter
purposes, in part or-in whole, is not permitted
MP1-309
unless(3400)-
authorised-1- into the
by ŠKODA AUTO poly
A. S.V-belt
ŠKODA AUTOpulley and
A. S. doesfit
notan open-or accept any liability
guarantee
end spanner (width
with respect to theacross
correctnessflats 17 mm)
of information todocument.
in this it. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

– Insert hexagon socket or TORX socket -2- into alternator shaft.

– Turn alternator shaft anti-clockwise using the torque wrench
-3- in order to tighten the poly V-belt pulley.
Tightening torque
V-ribbed belt pulley 80 Nm.

4. Alternator 47
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

5 start-stop system
⇒ “5.1 Safety precautions for vehicles with start-stop system”,
page 48
⇒ “5.2 General description”, page 48
⇒ “5.3 Fault recognition and fault display”, page 49
⇒ “5.4 Battery recharging or starting by external source on vehi‐
cles with start-stop system”, page 49
⇒ “5.5 Replacing the battery on vehicles with start-stop system”,
page 49
⇒ “5.6 Voltage stabiliser J532 ”, page 50
⇒ “5.7 Battery monitor control unit J367 ”, page 50
⇒ “5.8 Button for start-stop system”, page 51

5.1 Safety precautions for vehicles with

start-stop system

Caution

Risk of injury from automatic engine start.

♦ On vehicles with activated start-stop system (recogniza‐
ble by a message in the dash panel insert) there is a risk
that the engine can start automatically.
♦ It is therefore necessary
Protected by copyright. toforensure
Copying private or that the purposes,
commercial start-stop sys‐
in part or in whole, is not permitted
tem is deactivated
unless whenAUTO
authorised by ŠKODA carrying out work
A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A.on the not
S. does vehicle
guarantee or accept any liability
(switchwith ignition
respect tooff, if required
the correctness switchinignition
of information on Copyright
this document. again).by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

5.2 General description

The start-stop system is designed to reduce fuel consumption and
thus contributes to the reduction of pollutant emissions.
For this purpose the engine automatically switches off during
standstill phases of the vehicle and restarts automatically or when
operating the clutch pedal.
The system is always automatically activated when the ignition is
switched on and can be deactivated with the “start-stop” button in
the centre console.
Detailed description of the function as well as conditions for the
operation of the start-stop system see:
♦ ⇒ Self-study programme No. 86 ; Start-stop system in Škoda
vehicles
♦ ⇒ Operating instructions Rapid
Connection diagram of the start-stop system ⇒ Current flow dia‐
grams, Electrical fault finding and Fitting locations.

48 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

Note

♦ The components adapted for the start-stop system are not

specifically designated and differ only slightly from the usual
components (e.g. starter, generator).
♦ When carrying out repairs, pay attention to the correct desig‐
nation of the spare parts see ⇒ Electronic Catalogue of
Original Parts“ETKA” .

5.3 Fault recognition and fault display

The start-stop system is implemented in the software of the en‐
gine control unit - J623- as a function.
The engine control unit is equipped with self-diagnosis, which fa‐
cilitates the fault finding.
For fault finding use the ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester in the function
“Targeted fault finding”.

5.4 Battery recharging or starting by exter‐

nal source on vehicles with start-stop
system
When recharging or jump start on vehicles with start/stop system,
observe the following:
Do not disconnect the earth strap of the battery when recharging.
First of all connect to the positive terminals using the charge or
jump leads; then connect to the body mass (do not connect to the
negative terminal of the battery).

Note

♦ The direct charging (starting aid) of the battery at the negative

terminal results in the bypass of the battery monitoring control
unit - J367- (then the current flow is not monitored by this con‐
trol unit).
♦ The values regarding the battery state, which are stored in the
data bus diagnostic interface - J 533- (Gateway), would then
no longer correspond to the values of the charged battery.
♦ This can lead to the failure of the start-stop system.
♦ Testing and charging the battery ⇒ Electrical System – Gen‐
eral notes; Rep. gr. 27 . If a note cannot be accessed, open
Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
the Workshop Manual “Electrical System - General
with respect Notes”
to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
manually in “ELSA”, Section “27”.

5.5 Replacing the battery on vehicles with

“start-stop” system
AGM (Absorbent Glass Mat) batteries or batteries with a magic
eye with EFB technology (Enhanced Flooded Battery) are instal‐
led in vehicles with start-stop system.
When replacing the battery, only install a fleece battery (AGM) or
a battery with EFB technology with the same capacity (see ⇒
Electronic Catalogue of Original Parts“ETKA” ).
When replacing the battery with a new one, another type of bat‐
tery or a battery of a higher capacity you must set the battery
parameters, see ⇒ “1.9 Battery parameterisation”, page 20 .

5. start-stop system 49
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

For a description of function, testing and charging individual bat‐

teries see ⇒ Electrical System - General notes; Rep. gr. 27 . If a
note cannot be accessed, open the Workshop Manual “Electrical
System - General Notes” manually in “ELSA”, Section “27”.

5.6 Voltage stabiliser - J532-

The voltage stabilizer - J532- is located under the front driver’s
seat.
Its task is to stabilise the high voltage drop of the on-board power
supply, resulting from the start-stop operation, to 12 volts.
If it becomes apparent that the electrical consumers (such as ra‐
dio/navigation, telephone, dash panel insert) must be reset at
each engine start, while operating the start-stop system, this in‐
dicates that the voltage stabilizer is defective.
If the above mentioned electrical consumers fail at the same time,
first of all check the fuse of the voltage stabilizer see ⇒ Current
flow diagrams, Electrical fault finding and Fitting locations.
A direct entry relating to a malfunction of the voltage stabilizer via
⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester is not made at present.
Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Remove the driver's seat ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 72 .
Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
Rapid: unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
– Remove trim panel at bottom of pillar A, B and C ⇒ Body Work;
Rep. gr. 70 .
Spaceback:
– Remove trim panel at bottom of pillar A and B and the sill panel
⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 70 .
All vehicles:
– Lift up the carpet and the damper cover.
– Release screws -arrows-.
– Disconnect the plug -2- and remove the voltage stabiliser -1-.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.
Tightening torques
Fixing nut for stabiliser 3 Nm

5.7 Battery monitor control unit - J367-

The control unit is located directly at the negative connection ter‐
minal of the battery earth strap.
It transmits information on whether the battery has enough elec‐
tric power for the operation of the start-stop system.
It is connected to the data bus diagnostic interface - J533- (Gate‐
way) via the LIN data bus.
In the event of a failure, an entry is made in the event memory.
The start-stop system is switched off.

50 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

After replacing the battery monitoring control unit - J367- , perform

the adaptation (coding) with ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester.

5.8 Button for start-stop system

Removing and installing the button for the start-stop system
⇒ “2.11 Removing an installing the push-button for tyre pressure
inspection”, page 236 .

5. start-stop system 51
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

6 Front Assistant
⇒ “6.1 Installation location overview - Front Assistant”,
page 52
⇒ “6.2 Removing and installing front assistant system control
unit”, page 53
⇒ “6.3 Removing and installing the retaining plate of the front as‐
sistant system control unit”, page 53
⇒ “6.4 Calibrating the front assistant system”, page 55

6.1 Installation location overview - Front Assistant

1 - Dash panel insert

❑ with control unit in dash
panel insert - J285-
2 - Nut
❑ 2 pieces
❑ 8 Nm
3 - Cover
❑ As of week 51.2019
(facelift) bumper grille,
one piece. Fasten the
cover directly on the
Control unit for distance
control - J428- .
4 - Connector
5 - Adaptive cruise control unit
- J428-
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “6.2 Removing and in‐
stalling front assistant
system control unit”,
page 53
❑ Calibration
⇒ “6.4 Calibrating the
front assistant system”,
page 55
6 - Holder for the Adaptive
cruise control unit - J428-
❑ On the new part, the pin
bolts -Pos. 8- are pre-
configured in the base
position
7 - Adjusting screw
❑ Adjustment bolts for the
Adaptive cruise control
unit - J428-
❑ 2 pieces
8 - Retaining plate
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “6.3 Removing and installing the retaining plate of the front assistant system control unit”, page 53
9 - Quick-release fitting
❑ 3 pieces Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
❑ Replace after removal unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

52 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

6.2 Removing and installing front assistant

system control unit

Note

When replacing the Adaptive cruise control unit - J428- , connect

⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester and, in the operating mode “Targeted
fault finding” or “Targeted functions”, select the function “Replace
relevant control unit”.

Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
Vehicles manufactured up to CW 50.2019:
– Remove control unit cover from the grid in the front bumper.
Vehicles manufactured as of CW 51.2019 (facelift):
– Remove front bumper ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 63 .
All vehicles:
– Unscrew nuts -1- and remove the unit -2- with retaining plate
and plug -3-.

– Where necessary, remove catch pegs -arrows A-, tilt out con‐
trol unit -1- -arrow B- and push out from the holder -3-.
– Remove connector -2-.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– Calibrate the front assistant system
⇒ “6.4 Calibrating the front assistant system”, page 55 .
Tightening torques
♦ ⇒ “6.1 Installation location overview - Front Assistant”,
page 52

6.3 Removing and installing the retaining

plate of the front assistant system con‐
trol unit
Removing
– Removing the Adaptive cruise control unit - J428-
⇒ “6.2 Removing and installing front assistant system control
unit”, page 53 .

6. Front Assistant 53
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Unlock quick-release fittings -2- by rotating it -arrow-.

– Disconnect quick-release fittings -2- from the adjusting screws
-1-.
– Remove retaining plate -3- from the control unit -4-.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– Replace quick-release fittings -2-.

Note

The adjusting screws -1- in the new retaining plate are already
pre-adjusted. If necessary, correct the adjustment ⇒ page 54 .

Adjusting the adjusting screws

– Measure the adjustment dimension -a- on all adjusting screws
with a calliper gauge and adjust if necessary.
♦ Dimension -a- is 40.3 mm ± 0.5mm.

– Push new quick-release fittings -1- onto the adjusting screws

on the retaining plate -3-.
– Place the retaining plate -3- with the quick-release fittings onto
the bracket -2-.
– Secure the quick-release fittings -2- on the rear side of the
bracket -1- by turning to the stop in -direction of arrow-.
– Installing the Adaptive cruise control unit - J428-
⇒ “6.2 Removing and installing front assistant system control
unit”, page 53 .
– Fit cover -5-. From CW 51.2019 a different type of cover is
used directly on the control unit for distance control - J428- ,
see ⇒ Electronic catalogue of original parts “ETKA” ,
– Calibrate automatic distance control
⇒ “6.4 Calibrating the front assistant system”, page 55 .

54 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

6.4 Calibrating the front assistant system

Work procedure to calibrate the front assistant system ⇒ Chassis;
Rep. gr. 44 .

6. Front Assistant 55
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

90 – Gauges, instruments
1 Dash panel insert
⇒ “1.1 General description ”, page 56
⇒ “1.2 The self-diagnostic function of the dash panel insert”, page
57
⇒ “1.3 Adjust/replace dash panel insert”, page 57
⇒ “1.4 Removing and installing the dash panel insert ”,
page 57
⇒ “1.5 Contact assignment of plug connection on the dash panel
insert”, page 58
⇒ “1.6 Warning lights in the dash panel insert”, page 58
⇒ “1.7 Service interval display”, page 59

1.1 General description

Note

When handling a fault it is absolutely essential to know the func‐

tions, the setting and the operation of the dash panel insert.
Detailed description of the function of the dash panel insert, the
setting and the operation ⇒ Owner's manual Rapid .

The dash panel insert is supplied in three versions:

Basic design:
The dash panel insert is only fitted with two analogue indicators
(speed and rev counter). In-between there is the central display
with the following functions:
♦ Fuel gauge
♦ Clock
♦ Total trip counter and trip counter
♦ Service intervals
used warning lights and detailed description of the function
⇒ “1.6 Warning lights in the dash panel insert”, page 58 .
Dash panel insert with multifunction display:
Compared to theProtected
basicbydesign,
copyright. this one
Copying also orhas
for private a multifunction
commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
display with onboard computer
unless authorised and AUTO
by ŠKODA displayA. S.for automatic
ŠKODA AUTO A. S.gearbox
does not guarantee or accept any liability
(vehicles with automatic gearbox).
with respect Theofspeed
to the correctness counter
information and the
in this document. rev by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
Copyright
counter have a silver bordering.
Dash panel insert with maxi DOT display:
In this version the dash panel insert also has an analogous cool‐
ant temperature and fuel gauge which is located in the lower part
of the rev and speed counter. The upper warning light display is
replaced by a display with total trip counter and trip counter, clock
and service intervals. In the maxi DOT display the following warn‐
ing lights are replaced by a symbol and text display:
♦ Fuel reserve
♦ Coolant temperature / deficit
♦ Oil pressure / oil level

56 Rep. gr.90 - Gauges, instruments

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

♦ Washwater deficit
♦ Door and tailgate warning
♦ Particulate filter
♦ Immobiliser
♦ Brake pad wear
♦ Automatic gearbox lock

1.2 The self-diagnostic function of the dash

panel insert
The dash panel insert is controlled by a microprocessor and fea‐
tures a comprehensive self-diagnosis. If faults occur in the system
components, fault codes are stored in the event memory of the
dash panel insert.
Perform “self-diagnosis and coding” ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester.

1.3 Adjust/replace dash panel insert

⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester connect on-line (Network connection).
If the dash panel insert is replaced, the ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester
must be connected before removing the original dash panel insert
and “replace dash panel insert” must be selected in the guided
functions. Thereby the required values for the new dash panel
insert must be read into the diagnostic unit from the original dash
panel insert. If the original dash panel insert is not available or
does not communicate with the diagnostic unit, then proceed ac‐
cording to the information in the ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester
After installing the new dash panel insert, adapt all ignition keys
and check that the infotainment/radio is functioning.
To check infotainment/radio is functioning or perform adaptation,
see ⇒ “2.3 Electronic anti-theft coding”, page 66 (up to CW
21.2015) or ⇒ “3.6 Electronic anti-theft coding”, page 83 (from
CW 22.2015).

1.4 Removing and installing the dash panel

insert
Adjust/replace dash panel insert
⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester connect online.
If the dash panel insert is replaced, the ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester
must be connected before the removal of the original dash panel
insert and must be confirmed in the “Replace control unit” Guided
Functions of the applicable control unit. Thereby, the required
values are read into the diagnostic unit from the original dash
panel insert. If the original dash panel insert is not available or
does not communicate with the diagnostic unit, then proceed ac‐
cording to the information in the ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester
After fitting the new dash panel insert, adapt all ignition keys.

Note

Vehicles with interface for access and start system (keyless start
authorisation) - when teaching the keys according to the instruc‐
tions in the ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester process.
Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

Special tools and workshop equipment required

♦ Assembly tool - T10389- or Hook - 3438-

1. Dash panel insert 57

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

Removing
– Pull steering wheel out fully and lock it in its lowest position.
– Remove panel protection shield with top steering column cov‐
er -1-.

– Release screws -arrows-.

– With assembly tool - T10389- or Hook - 3438- slide the panel
out of the mounting opening. When pushing out, push the
panel towards the steering column.

– Press the catch -1- and disconnect the connector by tilting out
the clamp -arrow-.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points.
Tightening torques
Fixing screws for dash panel insert 1.5 Nm

1.5 Contact assignment of plug connection

on the dash panel insert
The contact assignment of the plug connections on the dash pan‐
el insert can be found under ⇒ Current flow diagrams, Electrical
fault finding and Fitting locations.

1.6 Warning lights in the dash panel insert

Detailed description of the function of the warning
Protected lights
by copyright. can for
Copying beprivate or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
found in the ⇒ Owner's manual Rapid unless
. authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

58 Rep. gr.90 - Gauges, instruments

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

Note

♦ The dash panel insert must not be disassembled.

♦ All warning lights are designed as LEDs. The dash panel insert
must be replaced if a warning/indicator light breaks down.
♦ The assignment of the warning lights depends upon the vehi‐
cle equipment, the country and the engine versions.

1.7 Service interval display

Operation
The electronic control of the service interval display consists of:
♦ a time counter
♦ two distance counters
The electronic control evaluates the contents of the counters so
that the customer is informed after a defined period of time has
elapsed or after a defined distance has been reached by the
service interval display that a service is required (depending on
what comes first).
Reset service interval display ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet Rapid .

1. Dash panel insert 59

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

2 Cruise control system (CCS)

The engine control unit controls the function of the CC on vehicles
which have a cruise control.
Apart from the CCS control switch in the left steering-column
switch there are no additional components of the CCS.
CCS connection can be found in ⇒ Current flow diagrams, Elec‐
trical fault finding and Fitting locations.

60 Rep. gr.90 - Gauges, instruments

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

91 – Radio, telephone, navigation

1 Radio - installed up to CW 21.2015
⇒ “1.1 General Instructions”, page 61
⇒ “1.2 Electronic anti-theft coding”, page 61
⇒ “1.3 Summary of components - radio”, page 62
⇒ “1.4 Removing and installing a radio ”, page 63
⇒ “1.5 Plug connections on the radio”, page 65
⇒ “1.6 Self-diagnostic function of radio system”, page 65

1.1 General Instructions

Note

♦ When retrofitting equipment, carrying out repair work or fault

finding ⇒ Installation Instructions for the radio and ⇒ Current
flow diagrams, Electrical fault finding and Fitting locations.
♦ Detailed assembly information, e.g. detaching and attaching
trim panels ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 70 .
♦ Additional information ⇒ Owner's Manual of the radio .

1.2 Electronic anti-theft

Protected by copyright. Copying forcoding
private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
The radio system with
is equipped
respect to the with Convenience
correctness of information inelectronic
this document. anti-
Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
theft lock, which operates in combination with the dash panel
insert.
The radio systems are protected with an anti-theft code.
For radio systems mounted at the factory the safety code is only
entered in the respective vehicle when it is initial setup. The safety
code does no longer have to be re-entered when subsequently
disconnecting and re-connecting the battery or when removing
and re-installing the radio system in the same vehicle. If the radio
system is installed in another vehicle or the dash panel insert is
replaced, the safety code must be entered again.
The radio systems in the vehicles are locked at the factory before
delivery to the dealers.
Before the vehicle is handed over to the customer, the anti-theft
code of the radio must be deactivated by entering a safety code.
The safety code can be read via the online connection with ⇒ Ve‐
hicle diagnostic tester (network connection).
The user must have a valid authorisation for the use of a pro‐
gramme to determine the radio coding.
Additional information ⇒ Owner's Manual of the radio .

1. Radio - installed up to CW 21.2015 61

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

Note

♦ If an incorrect safety code is entered, it can be corrected im‐

mediately at the next attempt. If an incorrect safety code is
entered once again, the radio is blocked for 1 hour.
♦ After one hour has elapsed, during which the radio as well as
the ignition must remain switched on (the time which has
elapsed since the lock was activated is shown in the display
of the radio), the procedure for deactivating the electronic anti-
theft coding can be repeated (always two attempts, then
locked for one hour).

1.3 Summary of components - radio

Note

The number and the design of the components depend on the

vehicle equipment and on the model year.

1 - Multi-functional steering
wheel
❑ Description, removing Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
and installing unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
⇒ “6 Multi-functional with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
steering wheel”,
page 98
2 - Radio
❑ installed in centre con‐
sole
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “1.4 Removing and in‐
stalling a radio ”,
page 63
❑ Plug connections on the
radio
⇒ “1.5 Plug connections
on the radio”,
page 65
3 - Roof antenna
❑ AM / FM and DAB re‐
ceivers
❑ with antenna amplifier
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “4 Replacing aerials,
aerial modules and aer‐
ial cables”, page 86
4 - Rear window aerial - R130-
❑ FM2 reception
❑ Spaceback type with
panoramic roof also
has:
♦ a panoramic roof aerial -
AM/FM receiver
♦ a side window aerial rear left - DAB receiver
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 64

62 Rep. gr.91 - Radio, telephone, navigation

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

5 - Connection for external audio sources AUX-IN - R199-

❑ is independently located in the centre console next to the handbrake
– Removing and installing
⇒ “7.3 Removing and installing connection for external audio sources R199 (AUX-IN, USB) ”,
page 101
❑ Vehicles with multimedia socket (MEDIA-IN) - located under the heating/air conditioning control next to
the USB input
– Removing and installing ⇒ “7 Multimedia socket MEDIA-IN”, page 100

6 - Multimedia socket MEDIA-IN (USB, AUX-IN)

– Removing and installing ⇒ “7 Multimedia socket MEDIA-IN”, page 100

7 - Rear full-range speaker

❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “8.1 Removing and installing front bass speaker and rear full-range speaker”, page 104
8 - Front treble speaker
❑ Vehicles with manual adjustment of exterior mirrors
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “8.2.2 Remove and install the speaker built into the internal door cover”, page 104
9 - Front bass speaker
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “8.1 Removing and installing front bass speaker and rear full-range speaker”, page 104
10 - Front treble speaker
❑ Vehicles with electrically adjustable exterior mirrors
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “8.2.1 Removing and installing the speaker inside the outside mirror cover”, page 104

Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
1.4 Removing and installing a radio
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

Note

♦ Before removing, take out any data media in the unit ⇒ Radio
Operating Instructions .
♦ The procedure for the installation work is the same on radios
“Blues” and “Swing”.

Removing

Caution

When using the lever tool, mask points where the lever tool is
applied using commercially available adhesive tape.

– Switch off the radio, all electrical components and take out the
ignition key.

1. Radio - installed up to CW 21.2015 63

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

“Blues” and “Swing” radios, installed up to CW 31.2013:

– Using the removal wedge - 3409- carefully prise off the frame
-1-.

“Swing” radio installed as of CW 32.2013

– Carefully prise off top cover for radio -1- with the removal
wedge - 3409- .

Continued for all vehicles:

– Unscrew the screws -arrows- and pull the radio out of the dash
panel.

– Compress plug catch -arrows-.

64 Rep. gr.91 - Radio, telephone, navigation

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Open catch clamp -arrow- and disconnect plug.

– Radio Blues - release plug of antenna socket -arrow- and dis‐

connect.

Note

When pushing the radio in, do not in any circumstances press on

the display or operating buttons. The radio may be damaged.

– If the radio has been replaced, perform initial setup (see

⇒ “1.2 Electronic anti-theft coding”, page 61 ).
Tightening torques
Fixing screws for radio 1.5 Nm

1.5 Plug connections on the radio

The current pin assignment can be found in ⇒ Current flow dia‐
grams, Electrical fault finding and Fitting locations, depending on
type and model year.

1.6 Self-diagnostic function of radio system

Carry out “self-diagnosis” with the ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester in
the function “Targeted fault finding”.

1. Radio - installed up to CW 21.2015 65

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

2 Amundsen+ navigation system - in‐

stalled up to CW 21.2015
⇒ “2.1 General description”, page 66
⇒ “2.2 General Instructions”, page 66
⇒ “2.3 Electronic anti-theft coding”, page 66
⇒ “2.4 Overall view of the navigation system”, page 67
⇒ “2.5 Removing and installing the navigation system”,
page 69
⇒ “2.6 Plug connections on the navigation system”, page 70
⇒ “2.7 Aerial for GPS signal reception”, page 70
⇒ “2.8 Diagnosis of the navigation system”, page 70

2.1 General description

The navigation system Amundsen+ combines the functions of the
radio unit with the CD changer and the navigation system.
The double DIN housing of the system contains:
♦ an RDS radio
♦ Control unit for traffic information for the reception of traffic
information
♦ Colour display
♦ a navigation system with GPSProtected
satellite receiver
by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
♦ CD drive for navigation system,with
audio
respectdiscs playable
to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

♦ a Bluetooth module is integrated in the navigation system

Amundsen+ which fulfils the function of the GSM II mobile
phone pre-installation (the control unit for the mobile phone
operating electronics - J412- is no longer fitted).

2.2 General Instructions

Note

♦ When retrofitting equipment, carrying out repair work or fault

finding ⇒ Current flow diagrams, Electrical fault finding and
Fitting locations and ⇒ Installation instruction for navigation
system .
♦ Detailed assembly information, e.g. detaching and attaching
trim panels ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 70 .
♦ Additional information ⇒ Owner's Manual of the navigation
system .

2.3 Electronic anti-theft coding

The navigation system is equipped with Convenience electronic
anti-theft lock, which operates in combination with the dash panel
insert.
The navigation system is protected against theft with a safety
code.
For navigation systems mounted at the factory, the safety code
is only entered in the respective vehicle when it is initial setup.
The safety code does no longer have to be re-entered when sub‐
sequently disconnecting and re-connecting the battery or when
removing and re-installing the navigation system in the same ve‐

66 Rep. gr.91 - Radio, telephone, navigation

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

hicle. If the navigation system is installed in another vehicle or the

dash panel insert is replaced, the safety code must be entered
again.
The navigation systems in the vehicles are locked at the factory
before delivery to the dealers.
Before the vehicle is handed over to the customer, the anti-theft
code of the navigation system must be deactivated by entering a
safety code.
The safety code can be read via the online connection with ⇒ Ve‐
hicle diagnostic tester (network connection).
The user must have a valid authorisation for the use of a pro‐
gramme to determine the coding of the navigation system.
Additional information ⇒ Owner's Manual of the navigation sys‐
tem .

Note

♦ If an incorrect safety code is entered, it can be corrected im‐

mediately at the next attempt. If an incorrect safety code is
entered once again, the navigation system is blocked for 1
hour.
♦ After one hour has elapsed, during which the navigation sys‐
tem as well as the ignition must remain switched on (the time
which has elapsed since the lock was activated is shown in
the display of the navigation system), the procedure for deac‐
tivating the electronic anti-theft coding can be repeated (al‐
ways two attempts, then locked for one hour).

2.4 Overall view of the navigation system

The number and the design of the components depend on the

vehicle equipment.

2. Amundsen+ navigation system - installed up to CW 21.2015 67

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

1 - Aerial for GPS signal recep‐

tion
❑ Spaceback type only
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “4.3 Removing and in‐
stalling the GPS aerial”,
page 91
2 - Multi-functional steering
wheel
❑ Description, removing
and installing
⇒ “6 Multi-functional
steering wheel”,
page 98
3 - Navigation system
❑ installed in the centre
console
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “2.5 Removing and in‐
stalling the navigation
system”, page 69
❑ Plug connections on the
navigation system
⇒ “2.6 Plug connections
on the navigation sys‐
tem”, page 70
4 - Roof antenna
❑ for the receiver:
♦ GPS - not valid for the
Spaceback type
♦ AM/FM and DAB
♦ GSM - equipment with ERA
Glonass (Russia, Belarus)
❑ with antenna amplifier
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “4 Replacing aerials, aerial modules and aerial cables”, page 86
5 - Rear window
Protectedaerial - R130-
by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
❑ FM2 reception
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

❑ Spaceback type with panoramic roof also has:

♦ a panoramic roof aerial - AM/FM receiver
♦ a side window aerial rear left - DAB receiver
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 64
6 - Multimedia socket MEDIA-IN (USB, AUX-IN)
– Removing and installing ⇒ “7 Multimedia socket MEDIA-IN”, page 100
7 - Rear full-range speaker
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “8.1 Removing and installing front bass speaker and rear full-range speaker”, page 104
8 - Front treble speaker
❑ Vehicles with manual adjustment of exterior mirrors
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “8.2 Removing and installing the front treble speaker”, page 104
9 - Front bass speaker
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “8.1 Removing and installing front bass speaker and rear full-range speaker”, page 104

68 Rep. gr.91 - Radio, telephone, navigation

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

10 - Front treble speaker

❑ Vehicles with electrically adjustable exterior mirrors
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “8.2 Removing and installing the front treble speaker”, page 104

2.5 Removing and installing the navigation

system

Note

The part number for the complete navigation system is indicated

on a sticker on the housing of the navigation system.

Removing
– Switch off the radio, all electrical components and take out the
ignition key.
– Carefully unlock the cover frame -1- of the navigation menu
with the removal wedge - 3409- .

– Release screws -arrows-.

– Pull the navigation system out of the dash panel.

– Compress plug catch -arrows-.

2. Amundsen+ navigation system - installed up to CW 21.2015 69

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Open catch clamp -arrow- and disconnect plug.

– Release plug of antenna socket -arrows- and disconnect.

Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:

Note

When inserting into the dash panel on no account press on the

display or on the buttons otherwise the navigation system may be
damaged.

If the navigation system was replaced:

Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
– Enter the safety code
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
⇒ “2.3 Electronic anti-theft coding”,
with respect page of66information
to the correctness and code in thisthe nav‐Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
document.
igation ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester.
Tightening torques
Fixing screws for navigation system 1.5 Nm

2.6 Plug connections on the navigation sys‐

tem
The current pin assignment can be found in ⇒ Current flow dia‐
grams, Electrical fault finding and Fitting locations, depending on
type and model year.

2.7 Aerial for GPS signal reception

Removing and installing
⇒ “4 Replacing aerials, aerial modules and aerial cables”,
page 86 .

2.8 Diagnosis of the navigation system

Carry out diagnosis with the ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester in the
function “Targeted Fault Finding”.

70 Rep. gr.91 - Radio, telephone, navigation

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

3 Infotainment system - installed as of

CW 22.2015
⇒ “3.1 Infotainment system - general notes”, page 71
⇒ “3.2 Summary of components - Infotainment system”,
page 71
⇒ “3.3 Installation – Infotainment system”, page 73
⇒ “3.4 Removing and installing the Infotainment display/control
unit”, page 76
⇒ “3.5 Removing and installing the infotainment control unit”,
page 81
⇒ “3.6 Electronic anti-theft coding”, page 83
⇒ “3.7 Basic (Blues) infotainment - initial setup, self-diagnosis”,
page 83

3.1 Infotainment system - general notes

Infotainment system - installed as of model year 2016 (as of CW
22.2015)
♦ Infotainment system = Multimedia information system (MIB –
modular infotainment kit).
♦ It enables the driver to access the vehicle setting, assistance
systems and comfort functions via a single system.
Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
Further information and
with description of function:
respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

⇒ Operating instructions Rapid

⇒ Owner's manual – Infotainment

3.2 Summary of components - Infotainment

system

Note

The number and the design of the components depend on the

vehicle equipment and on the model year.

3. Infotainment system - installed as of CW 22.2015 71

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

1 - Aerial for GPS signal recep‐

tion
On vehicles for Russia and Be‐
larus with the ERA Glonass
system and on vehicles with‐
out DAB (digital radio receiv‐
er), the GPS aerial is on the
roof (does not apply to the
Spaceback model with panor‐
amic sunroof)
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “4.2 Removing and in‐
stalling roof antenna”,
page 89
On other vehicles, the aerial is
under the dash panel (does not
apply to vehicles for Russia
with heated windscreen)
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “4.3 Removing and in‐
stalling the GPS aerial”,
page 91
2 - Multi-functional steering
wheel
❑ Description, removing
and installing
⇒ “6 Multi-functional
steering wheel”,
page 98
3 - Infotainment display unit
(Bolero, Amundsen)/display
and control unit (Blues, Swing)
Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
❑ Removing and installing
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
(Blues,withSwing equip‐
respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
ment)
⇒ “3.4 Removing and in‐
stalling the Infotainment display/control unit”, page 76
❑ Removing and installing (Bolero, Amundsen equipment)
⇒ “3.4.3 Removing and installing Infotainment display unit, installed until CW 50.2019”, page 80
4 - Infotainment control unit
❑ Bolero, Amundsen equipment
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “3.5 Removing and installing the infotainment control unit”, page 81
5 - Roof antenna
❑ Depending on equipment and country version – AM/FM, DAB, GSM, GPS reception
❑ with antenna amplifier
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “4 Replacing aerials, aerial modules and aerial cables”, page 86
6 - Rear window aerial - R130-
❑ FM2 reception
❑ Spaceback type with panoramic roof also has:
♦ a panoramic roof aerial - AM/FM receiver
♦ a side window aerial rear left - DAB receiver
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 64
7 - Connection for external audio sources AUX-IN - R199-
❑ is independently located in the centre console next to the handbrake

72 Rep. gr.91 - Radio, telephone, navigation

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Removing and installing

⇒ “7.3 Removing and installing connection for external audio sources R199 (AUX-IN, USB) ”,
page 101

8 - Multimedia socket MEDIA-IN (USB, AUX-IN)

– Removing and installing ⇒ “7 Multimedia socket MEDIA-IN”, page 100

9 - Rear full-range speaker

❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “8.1 Removing and installing front bass speaker and rear full-range speaker”, page 104
10 - Front treble speaker
❑ Vehicles with manual adjustment of exterior mirrors
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “8.2 Removing and installing the front treble speaker”, page 104
11 - Front bass speaker
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “8.1 Removing and installing front bass speaker and rear full-range speaker”, page 104
12 - Front treble speaker
❑ Vehicles with electrically adjustable exterior mirrors
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “8.2 Removing and installing the front treble speaker”, page 104

3.3 Installation – Infotainment system

⇒ “3.3.1 Basic infotainment equipment BASIC ”, page 73
⇒ “3.3.2 Mid-range Infotainment equipment ENTRY, installed un‐
til CW 50.2019”, page 74
⇒ “3.3.3 Mid-range Infotainment equipment ENTRY, installed
from CW 51.2019”, page 74
⇒ “3.3.4 Highest specification Infotainment equipment STAND‐
ARD, installed up to CW 50.2019”, page 75
⇒ “3.3.5 Highest specification Infotainment equipment STAND‐
ARD, installed from CW 51.2019”, page 76

3.3.1 Basic infotainment equipment “BASIC”

“Blues” installation
Basic type:
♦ round display
♦ Radio RDS AM/FM
♦ SD card slot
♦ External media inputs – sockets AUX-IN, USB
♦ Passive CAN bus – without component protection
♦ 4 x 20 W
Optional extension:
♦ Control option
Protectedvia the multifunction
by copyright. steering
Copying for private wheel
or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
Removing andwithinstalling
respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

⇒ “3.4 Removing and installing the Infotainment display/control

unit”, page 76 .
⇒ “3.7 Basic (Blues) infotainment - initial setup, self-diagnosis”,
page 83

3. Infotainment system - installed as of CW 22.2015 73

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

3.3.2 Mid-range Infotainment equipment “EN‐

TRY”, installed until CW 50.2019
Set “Swing”
Display and control unit form a single unit
Basic type:
♦ 5" colour touchscreen
♦ Radio RDS AM/FM
♦ SD card slot
♦ External media inputs – sockets AUX-IN, USB
♦ Vehicle comfort functions displays and settings
♦ Phone service
♦ i-Pod
Optional extension:
♦ Control option via the multifunction steering wheel
♦ DAB (digital reception – Entry Plus)
♦ Bluetooth
♦ Škoda Surround
Removing and installing
⇒ “3.4 Removing and installing the Infotainment display/control
unit”, page 76 .
⇒ “3.6 Electronic anti-theft coding”, page 83

3.3.3 Mid-range Infotainment equipment “EN‐

TRY”, installed from CW 51.2019
Infotainment Swing
Display unit for control unit of the display and operating unit, front
information - J685-

Note

Detailed functional description and operation of the infotainment

⇒ Rapid Owner's Manual .

74 Rep. gr.91 - Radio, telephone, navigation

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

3.3.4 Highest specification Infotainment

equipment “STANDARD”, installed up to
CW 50.2019
Bolero, Amundsen installation
1- Infotainment display unit
2- Infotainment control unit
Basic type:
♦ 6.5" capacitive touchscreen
♦ Radio RDS AM/FM
♦ SD card slot
♦ External media inputs – sockets AUX-IN, USB
♦ Vehicle comfort functions displays and settings
♦ Bluetooth
♦ Telephone + text message display
♦ i-Pod
♦ Mirror link
Optional extension:
♦ Control option via the multifunction steering wheel
♦ DAB (digital receiver)
♦ Škoda Surround
Amundsen
Functions such as Bolero, plus:
♦ 2 x SD card slot
♦ Navigation with 2D and 2.5D display (bird's eye view)
Removing and installing infotainment:
♦ Display units
⇒ “3.4.3 Removing and installing Infotainment display unit, in‐
stalled until CW 50.2019”, page 80
♦ Control units
⇒ “3.5 Removing and installing the infotainment control unit”,
page 81
⇒ “3.6 Electronic anti-theft coding”, page 83

3. Infotainment system - installed as of CW 22.2015 75

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

3.3.5 Highest specification Infotainment

equipment “STANDARD”, installed from
CW 51.2019
Infotainment Bolero
1- Display unit for control unit of the display and operating unit,
front information - J685-

Note

Detailed functional description and operation of the infotainment

⇒ Rapid Owner's Manual .

3.4 Removing and installing the Infotain‐

ment display/control unit
⇒ “3.4.1 Removing and installing the Infotainment display and
control unit, vehicles manufactured up to CW 50.2019”,
page 76
⇒ “3.4.2 Removing and installing the Infotainment display and
control unit, vehicles manufactured after CW 51.2019”,
page 79
⇒ “3.4.3 Removing and installing Infotainment display unit, instal‐
led until CW 50.2019”, page 80

3.4.1 Removing and installing the Infotain‐

ment display and control unit, vehicles
manufactured up to CW 50.2019
♦ Basic infotainment set (Blues) and Entry set (Swing)

Note

Before removing, take out any data media in the unit ⇒ Infotain‐
ment Operating Instructions .

Removing
– Switch off infotainment and all electrical components and re‐
move the ignition key.

Caution

When using the lever tool, mask points where the lever tool is
applied using commercially available adhesive tape.

– Carefully prise off top cover for infotainment

Protected by copyright. -1- with
Copying the re‐
for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
moval wedge - 3409- (start fromunlessbottom
authorised edge
by ŠKODA of AUTO
the cover.
A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

76 Rep. gr.91 - Radio, telephone, navigation

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

Blues:

Swing:

– Unscrew the screws -arrows- and pull the infotainment control

unit out of the dash panel.
Blues:

Swing up to CW 21/2017:

3. Infotainment system - installed as of CW 22.2015 77

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

Spring as of CW 22.2017:
– Insert unlocking tools into the openings in the display unit
-see fig.- until there is an audible click.
– Pull on the release tools -arrows- to remove the display unit
-1-.
All radios:

– Compress plug catch -arrows-.

– Open catch clamp -arrow- and disconnect plug.

– Blues infotainment - unlock plug of antenna socket -arrow- and

disconnect.

78 Rep. gr.91 - Radio, telephone, navigation

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Swing infotainment - unlock plug of antenna sockets

-arrows- and disconnect.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:

Note

When pushing the navigation system in, do not under any cir‐
cumstances press on the display or buttons. This may damage
the unit.

– If the infotainment control unit has been replaced, perform in‐

itial setup.
♦ Swing infotainment control unit
⇒ “3.6 Electronic anti-theft coding”, page 83
♦ Blues infotainment control unit
⇒ “3.7 Basic (Blues) infotainment - initial setup, self-diagno‐
sis”, page 83
Tightening torques
Fixing screw for infotainment control unit 1.5 Nm
Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted

3.4.2 Removing and installing

with respect the Infotain‐
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

ment display and control unit, vehicles

manufactured after CW 51.2019
♦ Entry and Standard Infotainment set (Swing and Bolero)
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Release tool - T10057-
Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!

Caution

Risk of damaging the infotainment screen.

♦ Slowly and carefully slide in the release tool and then re‐
move the display unit.

– Use unlocking tool - T10057- Pos. -1- to unclip the top cover
-2- of the unit -3- from the catches and remove it.

3. Infotainment system - installed as of CW 22.2015 79

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Unscrew the fixing screws -1- of the unit -2-.

– Carefully insert unlocking tools - T10057- , Pos. -2- in the re‐

cesses in the display unit -1- until they click into place audibly.
– Pull -arrows- on the tools -2- to carefully remove the unit -1-.
– Press back catches from the side and remove the unlocking
tools.

– Compress plug catch -arrows-.

– Open catch clamp -arrow- and disconnect plug.

– Release and pull off other plug connections.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:

Note

When inserting the display unit, do not press on the screen or on

the buttons, as this could cause damage.

When replacing the Display unit for the control unit of the display
and operating unit, information at the front - J685- to carry out the
coupling ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester.

3.4.3 Removing and installing Infotainment

display unit, installed until CW 50.2019
♦ Standard infotainment set (Bolero and Amundsen)

80 Rep. gr.91 - Radio, telephone, navigation

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

Removing
– Switch off infotainment and all electrical components and re‐
move the ignition key.

Caution

When using the lever tool, mask points where the lever tool is
applied using commercially available adhesive tape.

– Carefully prise off top cover for infotainment -1- with the re‐
moval wedge - 3409- (start from bottom edge of the cover.

– Release screws -arrows-.

– Remove the display unit from the dash panel.
– Release connector and remove it.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:

Note

When inserting into the dash panel, do not press on the display
or on the operating button, otherwise the display unit may be
damaged.

When replacing, connect the ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester, retrieve

the fault memory and delete if necessary.
Tightening torques
Fixing screws for display unit 1.5byNm
Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

3.5 Removing and installing the infotain‐

ment control unit
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Release tool - T10057-
Removing
– Remove the data storage device that is still in the Infotainment
control unit ⇒ Infotainment Owner's Manual .
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Remove the storage tray from the dash panel on the front
passenger side and let it hang there considering the connec‐
ted cable lengths ⇒ Body Work - Assembly work; Rep. gr.
70 .

3. Infotainment system - installed as of CW 22.2015 81

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Compress plug catch -arrows-.

– Open catch clamp -arrow- and disconnect plug.

– Release and pull off other plug connections.

– Unscrew screws -3-.

– Remove bracket -4- with unit -2- from the storage tray -1-.

82 Rep. gr.91 - Radio, telephone, navigation

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Insert the release tools - T10057- into the bores of the unit,
until they click audibly into place.
– Remove unit -1- from the bracket by pulling on the release
tools arrows -arrows-.
– Loosen the release tools by pressing on the clips and remove
them from unit.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
When replacing, couple the Infotainment control unit (see
⇒ “3.6 Electronic anti-theft coding”, page 83 ).
Tightening torques
Tighten the screws -3- for attaching the 1.5 Nm
infotainment control unit

3.6 Electronic anti-theft coding

Note

The following does not apply to the “Basic” (Blues) infotainment

equipment.

The Infotainment display/control unit is equipped with an elec‐

tronic comfort anti-theft coding, which operates in combination
with the dash panel insert.
The Infotainment display/control unit must be coupled with an ap‐
propriate vehicle using the ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester. The se‐
curity code is no longer entered.
The Infotainment display/control unit, which is installed at the fac‐
tory, is coupled only when it is used for the first time with the
corresponding vehicle. If the battery is disconnected and then re‐
connected orcopyright.
Protected by if the Infotainment
Copying for private display/control
or commercial purposes, unit is orremoved
in part in whole, is not permitted
fromunless
a vehicle
authorisedand then AUTO
by ŠKODA re-installed
A. S. ŠKODA inAUTO
the same vehicle,
A. S. does coupling
not guarantee or accept any liability
with the corresponding vehicle is no longer valid.
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

If the dash panel insert is replaced, the Infotainment display/con‐

trol unit must be coupled with the relevant vehicle once again.
The user must have a valid authorisation to use a programme for
coupling the Infotainment display/control unit.
Additional information ⇒ Infotainment Owner's Manual .

3.7 “Basic” (Blues) infotainment - initial set‐

up, self-diagnosis
Valid for Blues radio installed as of CW 22.2015.
1. Commissioning
Phase 1A:
– If the unit is in transport mode (it has never been switched on),
press the button to switch the unit on (on/off).
Result of phase 1A:
The unit switches to “select number of speakers” mode (2-4
speakers).
Phase 1B:

3. Infotainment system - installed as of CW 22.2015 83

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– If the unit has already been switched on, press the button to
switch on the unit (on/off) and then briefly press the RADIO ,
SETUP and EXTRAS buttons simultaneously.

Result of phase 1B:

The unit switches to “select number of speakers” mode (2-4
speakers).
Phase 2:
– To select the number of speakers installed in the vehicle, press
the ◄ button (only front speakers, x2 bass + x2 treble loud‐
speakers) or the ► button (x2 bass at front + x2 treble loud‐
speaker and x2 wide band loudspeakers at rear).

Note

The number of installs loudspeakers can be determined from the

vehicle identification number (VIN code) in the ELSA vehicle data.

Result of phase 2:
“Diagnosis OK” or “Not OK” is displayed on the unit's display.
Diagnosis OK:
Activation has been successful and the unit can be operated by
pressing the ► button or after a time limit (approx. 10 sec) for
station tuning, see ⇒ BASIC infotainment Owner's Manual .
Not OK:
To be operated, all the system components must be connected
to the unit.
If the unit identifies that one of the components listed below is not
connected, “Not OK” and the abbreviation for the component that
the unit has not recognised is shown on the display (max. eight
components, depending on equipment):
LF - Front left speaker
RF - Front right speaker
LR - Rear left speaker
RR - Rear right speaker
A1 - Primary aerial
A2 - Secondary aerial
USB - USB connection
AUX - Connection for external audio sources (AUX)
The unit is then switched off by pressing the ► button or after a
period of time (approx. 10
Protected sec). Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
by copyright.
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
Once the indicated components have been connected, repeat the
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

procedure from phase 1B.

2. Service mode
For information only:
Phase 1:
– Press the button to turn on the unit (on/off).
Phase 2:
– Press the SETUP button for approximately 5 seconds.

84 Rep. gr.91 - Radio, telephone, navigation

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

In service mode, you can navigate by using the ◄ and ► buttons

to view three items of information.
Part NO - Number of the unit
HW - Hardware
SW - Software

3. Infotainment system - installed as of CW 22.2015 85

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

4 Replacing aerials, aerial modules

and aerial cables
⇒ “4.1 Overview of locations where aerial systems are fitted”,
page 86
⇒ “4.2 Removing and installing roof antenna”, page 89
⇒ “4.3 Removing and installing the GPS aerial”, page 91
⇒ “4.4 Removing and installing the GSM aerial”, page 92
⇒ “4.5 Rear or side window aerial (Spaceback)”, page 94
⇒ “4.6 Panoramic roof aerial”, page 94
⇒ “4.7 Aerial module R254 for rear window aerial”, page 94
⇒ “4.8 Aerial module for rear left side window aerial”, page 94
⇒ “4.9 Aerial module for panoramic roof aerial”, page 94
⇒ “4.10 Replace and repair aerial cables”, page 95

4.1 Overview of locations where aerial sys‐

tems are fitted
⇒ “4.1.1 Overview of locations where aerial systems are fitted -
Rapid”, page 86
⇒ “4.1.2 Overview of locations where aerial systems are fitted -
Spaceback”, page 88

4.1.1 Overview of locations where aerial systems are fitted - Rapid

86 Rep. gr.91 - Radio, telephone, navigation

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

1 - GPS antenna - R50-

On vehicles for Russia and Be‐
larus with the ERA Glonass
system and on vehicles with‐
out DAB (digital radio receiv‐
er), the GPS aerial is on the
roof

On other vehicles, the aerial is

under the dash panel (does not
apply to vehicles for Russia
with heated windscreen)
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “4.3 Removing and in‐
stalling the GPS aerial”,
page 91
2 - Rear window antenna 1 -
R130-
❑ FM2 reception
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr.
64
3 - Roof antenna - R216-
❑ Depending on equip‐
ment and country ver‐
sion – AM/FM, DAB,
GSM, GPS reception
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “4.2 Removing and in‐
stalling roof antenna”,
page 89
4 - Aerial module - R254- for
rear window
Protectedaerial
by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
❑ Removing and installing
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
⇒ “4.7 Aerial module
R254 for rear window
aerial”, page 94
5 - LTE aerial
❑ Applies to vehicles manufactured from CW 51.2019 (Facelift).
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “4.4.2 Removing and installing GSM aerial, vehicles produced from CW 51.2019”, page 93

4. Replacing aerials, aerial modules and aerial cables 87

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

4.1.2 Overview of locations where aerial systems are fitted - Spaceback

1 - GPS antenna - R50-

On vehicles for Russia and Be‐
larus with the ERA Glonass
system and on vehicles with‐
out DAB (digital radio receiv‐
er), the GPS aerial is on the
roof (does not apply to vehicles
with panoramic sunroof)

On other vehicles, the aerial is

under the dash panel (does not
apply to vehicles for Russia
with heated windscreen)
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “4.3 Removing and in‐
stalling the GPS aerial”,
page 91
2 - Antenna module - R11- in‐
tegrated in the panoramic roof
❑ Applies to vehicles with
a panoramic roof
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr.
64
3 - Antenna module - R108- for
panoramic roof aerial
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “4.9 Aerial module for
panoramic roof aerial”,
page 94
4 - Roof antenna - R216-
❑ Depending on equip‐
ment and country ver‐
sion – AM/FM, DAB,
GSM, GPS reception
❑ with antenna amplifier
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “4.2 Removing and installing roof antenna”, page 89
5 - Aerial module - R254- for rear window aerial Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “4.7 Aerial module R254 for rear window aerial”, page 94
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

6 - Rear window antenna 1 - R130-

❑ FM2 reception
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 64
7 - Digital radio antenna - R183-
❑ in the left side window
8 - Left aerial module - R108-
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “4.8 Aerial module for rear left side window aerial”, page 94 .

88 Rep. gr.91 - Radio, telephone, navigation

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

4.2 Removing and installing roof antenna

⇒ “4.2.1 Removing and installing the roof aerial for radio up to CW
21.2015”, page 89
⇒ “4.2.2 Removing and installing the roof aerial for radio and nav‐
igation up to CW 21.2015”, page 90
⇒ “4.2.3 Removing and installing the roof aerial as of CW
22.2015”, page 91

4.2.1 Removing and installing the roof aerial for radio up to CW 21.2015

Note

Before installing the radio aerial, switch off all electrical consumers and take out the ignition key.

1 - Antenna rod
2 - Aerial base with integrated
amplifier
❑ to remove and install:
♦ Detach the moulded head‐
liner up to the A-pillars and
carefully unhook the rear
section downwards. For ve‐
hicles with panoramic sun‐
roof, lower the moulded
headliner completely ⇒
Body Work; Rep. gr. 70 .
3 - Connection for the antenna
cable going to the radio
4 - Hexagon nut with serrated
washer
❑ 6 Nm
❑ hexagonal nut is con‐
nected to serrated
washer by a plastic ring
❑ apply contact grease on
the inside of roof in the
area of the serrated
washer
5 - Roof

4. Replacing aerials, aerial modules and aerial cables 89

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

4.2.2 Removing and installing the roof aerial

for radio and navigation up to CW
21.2015

Note

♦ The number of connections of the aerial base depends on the

vehicle equipment.
♦ Before installing the radio aerial, switch off all electrical con‐
sumers and take out the ignition key.

1 - Antenna rod
❑ can be removed
2 - Aerial base with integrated
amplifier
❑ to remove and install:
♦ Detach the moulded head‐
liner up to the A-pillars and
carefully unhook the rear
section downwards. For ve‐
hicles with panoramic sun‐
roof, lower the moulded
headliner completely ⇒
Body Work; Rep. gr. 70 .
3 - Hexagon nut with serrated
washer
❑ 6 Nm
❑ hexagonal nut is con‐
nected to serrated
washer by a plastic ring
❑ apply contact grease on
the inside of roof in the
area of the serrated
washer
4 - Aerial cable to radio
❑ White plug
5 - Aerial cable to telephone
❑ Lilac plug
❑ not assigned
6 - Aerial cable to navigation
❑ Blue plug
7 - Aerial cable to radio
❑ black plug
❑ Reception of digital programme

90 Rep. gr.91 - Radio, telephone, navigation

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

4.2.3 Removing and installing the roof aerial

as of CW 22.2015

Note

♦ The number of connections of the aerial base depends on the

vehicle equipment.
♦ Before installing the radio aerial, switch off all electrical con‐
sumers and take out the ignition key.

Removing
– Detach the moulded headliner up to the A-pillars and carefully
unhook the rear section downwards. For vehicles with panor‐
amic sunroof, lower the moulded headliner completely ⇒ Body
Work; Rep. gr. 70 .
– Release and pull off the connector -1- on the aerial cables.
– Unscrew bolt -3-.
– Open holding clamp -2- and remove the aerial.
Installing
– Fit the antenna and press in the retaining clip -2- until it clicks
into place.
– Tighten fixing screw.
– Further installation occurs in reverse order.
Tightening torques
Fixing screw for aerial, Pos. -3- 6 Nm

4.3 Removing and installing the GPS aerial

Note

♦ Apples to the Spaceback model and all vehicles equipped with

navigation system from CW 22/2015, except vehicles with the
ERA Glonass system (Russia and Belarus – GPS aerial on the
roof, except the Spaceback model with panoramic sunroof).
♦ The GPS aerial is located on the dash panel cross member
behind the dash panel insert.

Removing
– Removing the dash panel ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 70 .
Version 1:
– Push aerial
Protected -1- from
by copyright. underneath
Copying off the mount
for private or commercial purposes, on the
in part or indash
whole, is not permitted
panel cross member
unless authorised -arrow-.
by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

4. Replacing aerials, aerial modules and aerial cables 91

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– When pressing out the aerial, press the retaining tabs

-arrows-.
– Unlock and remove the aerial connection.

Version 2:
– Release and remove the GPS aerial -2- with bracket -1- out of
the retaining tab -arrows-.

– Release GPS aerial -1- from the retaining tabs, arrows -A- and
-B- and take out of the bracket -2-.
– Unlock and remove the aerial connection.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– The aerial lug/bracket, see illustration, locks the correct posi‐
tion.

4.4 Removing and installing the GSM aerial

⇒ “4.4.1 Removing and installing GSM aerial, vehicles produced
up to CW 50.2019”, page 92
⇒ “4.4.2 Removing and installing GSM aerial, vehicles produced
from CW 51.2019”, page 93

4.4.1 Removing and installing GSM aerial, ve‐

hicles produced up to CW 50.2019

Note

Applies to the Spaceback model; on the Sedan model, the GSM

aerial is on the roof.

The GSM aerial is located on the bracket of the control unit for
emergency call module and communication unit - J949- behind
the dash panel on the driver's side.
Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability

92 Rep. gr.91 - Radio, telephone, navigation

with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Place the ignition key outside the vehicle to avoid accidentally

turning on the ignition.
– Remove the side vent from the dash panel on the driver's side
⇒ Heating, Air Conditioning; Rep. gr. 80 .
– Remove the side cover on the dash panel -1- on the driver's
side in -direction of arrow-.
– Remove the light switch
⇒ “2.1 Removing and installing light switch”, page 230 and the
headlight range control adjuster
⇒ “2.2 Removing and installing the headlight range control ad‐
juster”, page 230 .

– Push off the retaining tab in direction of arrow -A- and then
slide the aerial -1- out of the bracket -2- in direction of arrow
-B-.
– Unlock and remove the aerial connection.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

4.4.2 Removing and installing GSM aerial, ve‐

hicles produced from CW 51.2019
Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Place the ignition key outside the vehicle to avoid accidentally
turning on the ignition. Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
– Remove rear bumper ⇒ Body Work; Rep.to gr.
with respect 63 . of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
the correctness

– Release screw -2- and remove antenna -1-.

– Remove connector -3-.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

4. Replacing aerials, aerial modules and aerial cables 93

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

4.5 Rear or side window aerial (Spaceback)

The aerial cannot be replaced separately, in the event of a fault,
the rear- side window must be replaced ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr.
64 .
There are frequency filters for the frequency modulation on the
supply cables for the rear window heating, which are component
parts of the wiring harness and can not be replaced separately.

4.6 Panoramic roof aerial

The aerial cannot be replaced separately, in the event of a fault,
the panoramic roof must be replaced ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 64 .

4.7 Aerial module - R254- for rear window

aerial
Located next to the rear window wiper motor.
Removing
– Remove the cover for the rear wiper motor.
– Unlock and disconnect connectors -1- and -2-.
– Unscrew the screw -3-, but not fully.
– Undo screw with clip -3- out of the bearing, move aerial module
-4- -arrow- and remove.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
Tightening torques
Fixing screw for aerial module, Pos. -3- 2 Nm

4.8 Aerial module for rear left side window

aerial
For Spaceback type only.
Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Remove top left C pillar trim panel ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 70 .
– Unlock and disconnect connectors -1- and -3-.
– Unscrew the screw -4-, but not fully.
– Remove the screw and clip -4- from the mounting in direction
of arrow -A-; slide out and remove the aerial module -2- in
direction of arrow -B-.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
Tightening torques
Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
Fixing screw forauthorised
unless aerial bymodule, Pos.
ŠKODA AUTO -4-
A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A.2
S.Nm
does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

4.9 Aerial module for panoramic roof aerial

The aerial is located underneath the rear left headlining.

94 Rep. gr.91 - Radio, telephone, navigation

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Unhook headlining ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 70 .
– Unlock and disconnect connectors -3- and -4-.
– Unscrew the screw -2-, but not fully.
– Remove the screw and clip -2- from the mounting in direction
of arrow -A-; slide out and remove the aerial module -1- in
direction of arrow -B-.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
Tightening torques
Fixing screw for aerial module, Pos. -2- 2 Nm

4.10 Replace and repair aerial cables

Note

♦ Replacing and repairing aerial cables ⇒ Electrical system -

general information; Rep. gr. 97 . If a note cannot be ac‐
cessed, open the Workshop Manual “Electrical System -
General Notes” manually in “ELSA”.
♦ Spare leads and components ⇒ Electronic Catalogue of Orig‐
inal Parts ; Equipment; Subgroup 35.
♦ Do not crimp antenna cable or bend excessively! The mini‐
mum bending radius must not be less than 50 mm.
Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
– Whenwith
replacing thecorrectness
respect to the cable for the antenna
of information connection,
in this document. Copyrightcut it off AUTO A. S.
by ŠKODA
from the defective line.
The remainder of the defective cable remains in the vehicle.
– Lay new antenna cable close to the original cable and attach.
– Perform a functional test.

4. Replacing aerials, aerial modules and aerial cables 95

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

5 Telephone system
⇒ “5.1 Mobile phone pre-installation”, page 96
⇒ “5.2 Removing and installing the control unit for the mobile
phone operating electronics J412 ”, page 96
⇒ “5.3 Removing and installing the microphone for the telephone
R38 ”, page 97

5.1 Mobile phone pre-installation

Further information and description of function:
♦ ⇒ Operating instructions Rapid
♦ ⇒ Self-study programme No. 81 ; Bluetooth in Škoda vehicles
Mobile phone pre-installation (universal)
Valid for vehicles manufactured up to CW 21.2015
1- Radio
2- Door speakers
3- Voltage supply for telephone system
4- Microphone for the telephone - R38- , in the interior light
5- 54-pin connector on the control unit for the mobile phone
operating electronics - J412- (transmission/receiver unit)
6- Control unit for mobile phone operating electronics - J412-
(transmission/receiver unit)

Mobile phone pre-installation (universal) on vehicles with the

Amundsen+ navigation system and vehicles with mobile phone
pre-installation manufactured as of CW 22.2015

Note
Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
A Bluetooth module is integrated in the navigation system Amund‐
sen+ which fulfils the function of the GSM II mobile phone pre-
installation (the control unit for the mobile phone operating
electronics - J412- that is located under the right front seat is no
longer fitted)

1- Navigation system/infotainment
2- Door speakers
3- Microphone for the telephone - R38- , in the interior light

5.2 Removing and installing the control unit

for the mobile phone operating electron‐
ics - J412-
Installed up to CW 21.2015. As of CW 22.2015, mobile phone pre-
installation is integrated into the infotainment control unit (see
⇒ “3.3 Installation – Infotainment system”, page 73 ).
The control unit is located below the right front seat under the floor
covering.
Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Remove front passenger seat ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 72 .

96 Rep. gr.91 - Radio, telephone, navigation

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Remove trim panel at bottom of pillar A and B ⇒ Body Work;

Rep. gr. 70 .
– Raise floor covering.
– Unlock by tilting out the clamp and disconnect the plug con‐
nection.
– Unscrew the nuts -arrows-.
– Remove control unit -1-.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– When replacing, code the new control unit after the installation
⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester.
Tightening torques
Fixing nuts for control unit for the mobile 2 Nm
phone operating electronics - J412-

5.3 Removing and installing the microphone

for the telephone - R38-
The microphone is located in the interior light.
Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Remove interior light
Protected by⇒copyright.
“1.1 Removing andorinstalling
Copying for private the front
commercial purposes, interior
in part light”,
or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
page 223 .
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

– Disconnect the plug connection -1- and release the micro‐

phone -2- from the catches in the interior light.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

5. Telephone system 97
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

6 Multi-functional steering wheel

⇒ “6.1 Multi-functional steering wheel - general instructions”, page
98
⇒ “6.2 Removing and installing the multi-function buttons on the
steering wheel E441 / E440 ”, page 98

6.1 Multi-functional steering wheel - general

instructions

Note

♦ When handling a fault, it is absolutely essential to know the

function and operation of the multi-functional steering wheel.
♦ Additional information and description of function ⇒ Owner's
manual Rapid .

The multi-functional steering wheel contains (depending upon

equipment) the following components:
♦ Multifunction buttons in the steering wheel on the left - E440-
and right -E441- for the operation of the Infotainment
♦ Multifunctional steering wheel control unit - J453- , integrated
in the left front switch unit
The multi-functional steering wheel control unit - J453- commu‐
nicates via the LIN databus with the vehicle voltage control unit -
J519- .

6.2 Removing and installing the multi-func‐

tion buttons on the steering wheel -
E441- / -E440-
Removing

Caution

When using the lever tool, mask points where the lever tool is
applied using commercially
Protected available
by copyright. Copying for private adhesive tape. in part or in whole, is not permitted
or commercial purposes,
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

– Disconnect battery earth strap

⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10 .
– Remove the airbag unit in the steering wheel ⇒ Body Work;
Rep. gr. 69 .
Vehicles manufactured up to CW 50.2019
– Carefully lever the plate with switch units -2- out of the steering
wheel -1- using the removal wedge - 3409- -arrows-.
– Disconnect plug.

98 Rep. gr.91 - Radio, telephone, navigation

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Unscrew screws -3-.

– When removing the units -1- and -2-, carefully detach the con‐
necting cable from the bearing -arrows-.

Vehicles manufactured as of CW 51.2019:

– Prise out the plate with switch units -2- evenly and carefully
out of the steering wheel -1- using the disassembly wedge
-arrows-.
– Disconnect plug.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:

Note

♦ Do not press the operating elements of the multifunction but‐

tons during installation.
♦ Before the airbag is installed, it must bebychecked
Protected if all the
copyright. Copying wiring
for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
is properly pressed back into the guiding grooves in the steer‐
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
ing wheel foam. Wiring which protrudes can be damaged by
the backside parts of the airbag.
♦ Follow the work procedure when connecting the battery
⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10 .

– When replacing, connect the ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester, re‐

trieve the event memory and delete if necessary.
Tightening torques
Mounting screws for switch unit 0.4 Nm

6. Multi-functional steering wheel 99

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

7 Multimedia socket MEDIA-IN

⇒ “7.1 General description”, page 100
⇒ “7.2 Removing and installing the control unit for multimedia
system J650 ”, page 100
⇒ “7.3 Removing and installing connection for external audio
sources R199 (AUX-IN, USB) ”, page 101
⇒ “7.4 Removing and installing the rear USB charging module”,
page 102

7.1 General description

This is designed to connect the audio signal from the external
stereo systems and to play back music from these systems via
the radio/navigation installed ex works.
The MEDIA-IN multimedia socket includes the AUX-IN and (de‐
pending on equipment) USB inputs.
Until CW 21.2015, the control unit for multimedia system - J650-
is part of the MEDIA-IN multimedia socket; thereafter, it is no
longer installed.
Description of function ⇒ Operating instructions of the radio/nav‐
igation/infotainment system .
Contact assignment of plug connection and current flow diagram
⇒ Current flow diagrams, Electrical fault finding and Fitting loca‐
tions.

7.2 Removing and installing the control unit

for multimedia system - J650-
Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
Installed up to CW 21.2015. with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

The control unit for multimedia system - J650- is located below

the glove compartment/front passenger's side.
Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Remove the storage compartment in the dash panel on the
front passenger side ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 70 .
– Remove connector -4-.
– Unscrew screw -1- and release the unit with the bracket -3-
from the retaining tabs -arrows-.
– Remove connector -2-.
– Remove the unit with the bracket from the vehicle or push it
out of the bracket.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– When replacing the control unit, it must be checked or coded
with ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester
Tightening torques
Fixing screws for control unit for multime‐ 4 Nm
dia system - J650-

100 Rep. gr.91 - Radio, telephone, navigation

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

7.3 Removing and installing connection for

external audio sources - R199- (AUX-
IN, USB)
⇒ “7.3.1 Removing and installing connection for external audio
sources R199 (AUX-IN, USB) under the heating”, page 101
⇒ “7.3.2 Removing and installing the connection for external audio
sources R199 (AUX-IN) in centre console next to the handbrake”,
page 102

7.3.1 Removing and installing connection for

external audio sources - R199- (AUX-
IN, USB) under the heating
Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
Vehicles up to CW 21.2015:
– Remove the storage compartment in the dash panel on the
front passenger side ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 70 .
– Disconnect plug -2- from control unit for multimedia system -
J650- .
All vehicles:

Caution

When using the lever tool, mask points where the lever tool is
applied using commercially available adhesive tape.

– Lever off the cover -1- using the disassembly wedge - 3409-
-arrow-.

– Vehicles manufactured up to CW 50.2019 - release multime‐

dia socket MEDIA-IN (USB and AUX-IN) -2- from the catches
and slide outwards -arrow-.
Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

7. Multimedia socket MEDIA-IN 101

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Vehicles manufactured from CW 51.2019 - release the pan‐

elling with USB connections -1- from the catches arrows -A-
and slide out of the carrier in the direction of arrow -B-.
– Disconnect plug connections -2-.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

7.3.2 Removing and installing the connection

for external audio sources - R199-
(AUX-IN) in centre console next to the
handbrake
Removing
– Switch off the radio, all electrical components and take out the
ignition key.
– Remove the centre console between driver and front passen‐
ger ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 68 .
– Disconnect plug.
– Press together the retaining tabs -arrows- and push connec‐
tion for external audio sources -1- out of the centre console
-2-.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

7.4 Removing and installing the rear USB

charging module
Removing
Variant 1:
– Disassemble the panel with USB connectors -1- with the dis‐
assembly wedge from the rear support in the centre console
-arrows-.
– Disconnect plug.

102 Rep. gr.91 - Radio, telephone, navigation

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Detach USB charging module -1- from the panel detents ar‐
rows -A- -2- in the direction of the arrow -B-

Variant 2:
– Loosen and remove the casing with USB connections -1- from
the locking lugs using a disassembly wedge.
– Disconnect plug.

– Detach USB charging module -2- from the panel detents ar‐
rows -A- -1- in the direction of the arrow -B-
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

7. Multimedia socket MEDIA-IN 103

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

8 Loudspeaker arrangement
⇒ “8.1 Removing and installing front bass speaker and rear full-
range speaker”, page 104
⇒ “8.2 Removing and installing the front treble speaker”,
page 104

8.1 Removing and installing front bass

speaker and rear full-range speaker
Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Remove the door trim panel from which the loudspeaker is
removed ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 70 .
– Disconnect socket connector at the loudspeaker.
– Use a suitable drill to drill open the rivets -arrows- and take out
the faulty speaker.

Note

♦ It is important to remove all the drill swarf from the door since
it can otherwise lead to corrosion.
♦ Any damage to the paintwork which is caused by drilling out
the rivets must be repaired immediately by a specialist.

Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.
– Attach the new speaker with matching blind rivets.

8.2 Removing and installing the front treble

speaker
⇒ “8.2.1 Removing and installing the speaker inside the outside
mirror cover”, page 104
⇒ “8.2.2 Remove and install the speaker built into the internal door
cover”, page 104

8.2.1 Removing and installing the speaker in‐

side the outside mirror cover
Applies to vehicles with electrically adjustable exterior mirrors.
In the event of a fault, the internal mirror cover must be replaced
⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 70 .

8.2.2 Remove and install the speaker built into

the internal door cover
Applies to vehicles with manually adjustable exterior mirrors.
Removing
Vehicles without preparation for screwing in a new loudspeaker:
In the event of a fault, replace the internal door cover or the cover
for the Protected
internalby door control
copyright. Copying ⇒ Bodyor Work;
for private Rep.
commercial gr. in70
purposes, part.or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
Vehicleswith
with preparation for screwing in a new speaker:
respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

– Remove the front door panel ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 70 .

104 Rep. gr.91 - Radio, telephone, navigation

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Carefully drill out the heads of the plastic rivet -1- with a suit‐
able drill and remove the speaker -2-.
– Remove the remains of the plastic rivet (cut off, grind down).
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– Secure new speaker -2- with screws -3- (see ⇒ Electronic
Catalogue of Original Parts “ETKA” ).
Tightening torques
Component Nm
Fixing screws for speakers 0.5 Nm

8. Loudspeaker arrangement 105

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

9 SmartLink system
⇒ “9.1 SmartLink system - general instructions”, page 106

9.1 SmartLink system - general instructions

♦ The SmartLink system transmits the communication between
the vehicle's infotainment system and a connected communi‐
cation device (mobile/tablet) belong to the customer.
♦ As of week 22/2017, the SmartLink system is replaced by the
SmartLink+ system. This renders the control unit for wireless
data transmission - J1070- obsolete that was previously in‐
stalled under the seat. Your functions are integrated in the
Control unit for information electronics 1 - J794- .
♦ Using this system, the software applications installed in the
communications equipment (such as navigation, web radio,
weather), can be displayed and controlled in the infotainment
display.
♦ The SmartLink system is part of the maximum infotainment
equipment (Bolero, Amundsen) and has no other separately
installed parts.
♦ You can find a detailed description of functions, operation as
well as connection up to KW 21/2017 in the ⇒ Bolero / Amund‐
sen Infotainment instruction manual , from KW 22/2017 in the
⇒ Rapid Owner’s Manual ,“infotainment” chapter.
The SmartLink function supports the following types of connection
♦ Android Auto
♦ Apple CarPlay
♦ MirrorLink

Caution

For correct communication with the SmartLink system, the

customer's communications device (mobile phone/tablet) and
the installed software applications must function correctly.
Not every mobile/tablet is compatible within the scope of the
SmartLink system.
For details of mobile/tablet compatibility, and the available ap‐
plications, visit the ŠKODA website.
ŠKODA AUTO a.s. assumes no responsibility for any problems
due to incompatibility or improper function of cell phones/tab‐
lets or the applications installed on them

106 Rep. gr.91 - Radio, telephone, navigation

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

10 SmartGate system
⇒ “10.1 SmartGate system - general notes”, page 107
⇒ “10.2 SmartGate system - check the correct function”,
page 108
⇒ “10.3 Removing and installing the control unit for wireless data
transfer J1070 (SmartGate)”, page 109
⇒ “10.4 Set the parameters for the Wi-Fi connection”, page 110
⇒ “10.5 Update firmware”, page 111

10.1 SmartGate system - general notes

SmartGate system
♦ As of week 22/2017, the SmartGate system is replaced by the
SmartLink system,
⇒ “9.1 SmartLink system - general instructions”, page 106 .
♦ The SmartGate system offers the possibility to access the
driving data via the wireless Wi-Fi connection.
♦ This is one-way communication of the connected communi‐
cations of the customer's equipment (e.g., mobile phone, tab‐
let, laptop) with the control unit for the SmartGate system.
♦ The driving data received can then be processed (depending
on the application used and installed on the communications
equipment).
♦ The Wi-Fi range is limited to the interior of the vehicle.
♦ The control unit for wireless data transfer - J1070- located un‐
der the driver's seat is part of the system.
♦ For a detailed description of the functions, operations and
connection, see the ⇒ Rapid Owner's Manual .

Caution

Correct communication within the scope of the SmartGate sys‐

tem relies on the customer's communications equipment (e.g.,
mobile phone/tablet) functioning correctly, and on the software
applications being installed.
Not every cell phone/tablet is compatible within the scope of
the SmartGate system.
For details of mobile phone/tablet compatibility, and the avail‐
able applications, visit the ŠKODA website (www.skoda-
auto.com).
ŠKODA AUTO a.s. assumes no responsibility for any problems
due to incompatibility or improper function of cell phones/tab‐
lets or the applications installed on them
Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

10. SmartGate system 107

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

10.2 SmartGate system - check the correct

function

Caution

Correct communication within the scope of the SmartGate sys‐

tem relies on the communications equipment (e.g., mobile/
tablet) functioning correctly, and on the software applications
being installed.
Not every cell phone/tablet is compatible within the scope of
the SmartGate system.
For details of mobile phone/tablet compatibility, and the avail‐
able applications, visit the ŠKODA website (www.skoda-
auto.com).
ŠKODA AUTO a.s. assumes no responsibility for any problems
due to incompatibility or improper function of cell phones/tab‐
lets or the applications installed on them

For a detailed description of the functions, operations and con‐

nection, see the ⇒ Rapid Owner's Manual .
The correct function of the SmartGate system is verified by the
device itself.
To check it is working correctly, you can use, e.g., ⇒ Vehicle di‐
agnostic tester mobiles, tablets, and laptops, referred to as “com‐
munication devices” below.
For the connection, ask the customer for the PIN code (password)
for the SmartGate system.
Connecting with a Wi-Fi device
Requirements:
♦ Switch on Wi-Fi on the communications equipment to be con‐
nected
♦ Switch on the ignition
Open a connection to SmartGate (login to a Wi-Fi network)
♦ Search for available Wi-Fi connections on the connected com‐
munications equipment - SmartGate identifies the connected
communications device as SmartGate_...
♦ The last six symbols of the vehicle identification number (VIN
code) are displayed at the position....
♦ Enter the password supplied unless
by the customer, for the initial
Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
connection, enter the 17 digits of
withthe vehicle
respect identification
to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
number (VIN) (in uppercase).

Note

♦ If no PIN code (password) is available, then switch off the ig‐

nition and, if necessary, disconnect the battery earth strap or
the connector on the SmartGate unit for approx. 30 seconds.
♦ After re-connecting the battery earth strap, switch on the igni‐
tion and enter the vehicle identification number (in uppercase)
as the PIN code.
♦ Up to four communications devices can be connected to the
SmartGate system at the same time.

108 Rep. gr.91 - Radio, telephone, navigation

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

Connection problems
If the connection fails, then check the following points:
♦ Are the conditions for a successful connection fulfilled?
♦ Does SmartGate show up in the list of available Wi-Fi net‐
works?
♦ Was password required for validating the connection entered
correctly?
♦ Is the communications equipment to be connected possibly
still connected to another Wi-Fi network?
If the above mentioned points are okay, and the connection still
fails, then check the state of the LED display on the control unit
for wireless data transfer - J1070- (SmartGate) located under the
driver's seat.
If the LED display -arrow- on the control unit:
♦ is unlit or lit red, the device is not OK, check the electrical wiring
as per ⇒ Current flow diagrams, Electrical fault finding and
Fitting locations; if needed, replace the SmartGate control unit
♦ red flashing - this is a self-test, wait for the test to complete (on
initial activation)
♦ lit green – the device is OK, no user is connected
♦ green flashing - the device is OK, at least one user is connec‐
ted and the SmartGate application is active on the connected
communication device (if you connect without an active appli‐
cation - the LED display is lit green)
♦ flashing red and green - the device is OK; and still in production
mode (indicates production mode, for example in Production,
where multiple vehicles with SmartGate exist at one location)
♦ orange (red and green at the same time) – the device is in
upgrade mode, wait for this mode to complete
Disconnecting
The connection to SmartGate can be disconnected in one of the
following ways:
♦ by disconnecting the connection to SmartGate on the connec‐
ted communications device
♦ by disabling Wi-Fi on the connected communications device
♦ by switching off the ignition and removing the ignition key for
more than 5 s (for vehicles with an ignition starter switch, by
switching off the ignition and opening the driver door)

10.3 Removing and installing the control unit

for wireless data transfer - J1070-
(SmartGate)
Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
Removing
The control unit for wireless data transfer - J1070- (SmartGate) is
attached under the driver's seat to the floor covering by a Velcro
fastener.
– Move the driver's seat as far back and up as possible.

10. SmartGate system 109

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Remove control unit -2- from the Velcro fastener and, taking
the lengths of the connected cables into consideration, re‐
move the unit.
– Remove connector -1-.

– To pull off the connector, press the latch -1-, and release the
connector by tilting out the bar -arrow-.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– Fit the unit control close to the seat cross-member on the level
surface of the floor covering (see figure)
– The electrical wiring loom for the control unit must not be under
tension.
– Press the control unit securely onto the floor covering.
– Do the following when replacing the control unit:
♦ Update firmware ⇒ “10.5 Update firmware”, page 111
♦ Check functionality
⇒ “10.2 SmartGate system - check the correct function”, page
108

10.4 Set the parameters for the Wi-Fi con‐

nection
Some properties of the Wi-Fi connection can be changed and
configured using the connected communications device (e.g.,
⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester, mobile phone, tablet, laptop).
After fulfilling the conditions for a successful connection, enter the
address »HTTP://192.168.123.1/index.html« in the web browser
of the connected communications device. You will see a menu for
setting the parameters for the SmartGate Wi-Fi connection.
Configuration options:
♦ SSID
♦ Chanel (1 to 10) – manual setting of the connection
Protected by copyright. channel
Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
♦ Security – setting the security level for with
therespect
connection
to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

Open – unencrypted connection, no password entry required

on the device to be connected; the connection is set up auto‐
matically
WPA or WPA2 – encrypted connection
♦ WPA/WPA2 key - password input
♦ Transmitting power in % - sets the signal strength in percent
♦ DHCP (lease time) - time for which the IP address remains
valid
♦ Web interface: port - web interface

110 Rep. gr.91 - Radio, telephone, navigation

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

If you change the connection encryption from unsecured (open)

to secured WPA or WPA2, you must enter a password on the
communications equipment to be connected.
If no PIN code (password) is available, then switch off the ignition
and, if necessary, disconnect the battery earth strap or the con‐
nector on the SmartGate unit for approx. 30 seconds. The Smart‐
Gate is reset to the factory default settings and transmission
encryption is set to WPA2.
After re-connecting the battery earth strap, switch on the ignition
and enter the vehicle identification number (in uppercase) as the
PIN code.

10.5 Update firmware

To update the SmartGate firmware, you can use, e.g., ⇒ Vehicle
diagnostic tester mobile phones, tablets, laptops; referred to as
communications devices in the following.

Caution

Correct communication within the scope of the SmartGate sys‐

tem relies on the communications device functioning correctly,
and on the software applications being installed.
Not every cell phone/tablet is compatible within the scope of
the SmartGate system.
For details of mobile phone/tablet compatibility, and the avail‐
able applications, visit the ŠKODA website (www.skoda-
auto.com).
The firmware update function is not available in the Internet
Explorer web browser version 9 and older.

Updateby data
Protected from
copyright. theforŠKODA
Copying websitepurposes,
private or commercial are needed for
in part or in theis firm‐
whole, not permitted
ware
unless update.
authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
During the entire upgrade process, make sure that the ignition is
on, or the engine is running (avoid starting the engine during the
upgrade procedure).
Update procedure:
– Download the update data for SmartGate from the ŠKODA
website; save them on the communications device (one file).
– Switch on Wi-Fi on the communications device.
– Switch on the ignition and start the engine.
– Connect the communications device with SmartGate.
– Open the web browser on the communications device, and
enter the address »HTTP://192.168.123.1/index.html«.
– At the bottom of the SmartGate menu that appears, select the
firmware upgrade menu item.
– Select the update data stored on the communications device.
– Pressing “start update” copies the update data to SmartGate
(copying takes about 5 min).
– After downloading the data and confirming “perform update”,
the update starts (the update process takes approx. 2 min).
– After completing firmware update, the SmartGate is restarted.

10. SmartGate system 111

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

Note

♦ During the update process, the LED display on the control unit
for control unit for wireless data transfer - J1070- -arrow- lights
up orange (red and green at the same time).
♦ After completing the update and restarting the SmartGate, the
LED display -arrow- lights up/flashes green (see
⇒ page 109 ).

112 Rep. gr.91 - Radio, telephone, navigation

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

11 Mobile services online

⇒ “11.1 General Instructions”, page 113
⇒ “11.2 Installation location overview - mobile online services”,
page 113
⇒ “11.3 Removing and installing control unit for emergency call
module and communication unit J949 ”, page 115
⇒ “11.4 Removing and installing emergency call button E276 ”,
page 116
⇒ “11.5 Removing and installing speaker for emergency call mod‐
ule R335 ”, page 117
⇒ “11.6 Replacing, adapting and activating control unit for emer‐
gency call module and communication unit J949 ”, page 117
⇒ “11.7 Checking that the components and communication of the
ERA Glonass system are functioning”, page 119
⇒ “11.8 Replacing battery for control unit for emergency call mod‐
ule and communication unit J949 ”, page 121

11.1 General Instructions

The functions for mobile services online are integrated into the
control unit for emergency call module and communication unit -
J949- .
When handling aProtected
fault itbyis absolutely
copyright. essential
Copying for to knowpurposes,
private or commercial the func‐
in part or in whole, is not permitted
tions of the mobile services
unless online.
authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
Further information and description of function ⇒ Owner's manual
Rapid .
Fault finding is performed using ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester.

11.2 Installation location overview - mobile online services

11. Mobile services online 113

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

1 - Control unit for emergency

call module and communica‐
tion unit - J949-
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “11.3 Removing and
installing control unit for
emergency call module
and communication unit
J949 ”, page 115
❑ Replace, adjust and ac‐
tivate
⇒ “11.6 Replacing,
adapting and activating
control unit for emer‐
gency call module and
communication unit
J949 ”, page 117
❑ Replacing battery
⇒ “11.8 Replacing bat‐
tery for control unit for
emergency call module
and communication unit
J949 ”, page 121
2 - GSM aerial
On vehicles without DAB aerial
(digital radio receiver) and on
vehicles for Russia and Bela‐
rus, the GPS aerial is on the
roof (does not apply to the
Spaceback model with panor‐
amic sunroof)
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “4.2 Removing and in‐
stalling roof antenna”,
page 89by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
Protected
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
On vehicles with panoramic
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

sunroof, with DAB aerial (digi‐

tal radio receiver), the aerial is under the dash panel
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “4.4 Removing and installing the GSM aerial”, page 92
❑ from CW 51.2019, it is installed under the rear left bumper, see
⇒ “4.1.1 Overview of locations where aerial systems are fitted - Rapid”, page 86
3 - GPS antenna
On vehicles for Russia and Belarus and on vehicles without DAB (digital radio receiver), the aerial is on the
roof (does not apply to the Spaceback model with panoramic sunroof)
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “4.2 Removing and installing roof antenna”, page 89
On other vehicles, the aerial is under the dash panel
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “4.3 Removing and installing the GPS aerial”, page 91
4 - Emergency call button - E276-
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “11.4 Removing and installing emergency call button E276 ”, page 116
5 - Telephone microphone - R38-
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “5.3 Removing and installing the microphone for the telephone R38 ”, page 97
6 - Roof antenna
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “4.2 Removing and installing roof antenna”, page 89
7 - Control unit for IT 1 - J794-
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “3.5 Removing and installing the infotainment control unit”, page 81

114 Rep. gr.91 - Radio, telephone, navigation

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

8 - Display unit for control unit of the display and operating unit, front information - J685-
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “3.4.3 Removing and installing Infotainment display unit, installed until CW 50.2019”, page 80
9 - Speaker for emergency call module - R335-
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “11.5 Removing and installing speaker for emergency call module R335 ”, page 117

11.3 Removing and installing control unit for

emergency call module and communi‐
cation unit - J949-
The control unit for emergency call module and communication
unit - J949- is behind the dash panel on the driver's side.

Note

For replacement, follow

⇒ “11.6 Replacing, adapting and activating control unit for emer‐
gency call module and communication unit J949 ”, page 117 .

Removing
– Switch off the ignitionunless
and authorised
all electrical
by ŠKODA consumers!
Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
– Place the ignition key outside the vehicle to avoid accidentally
turning on the ignition.
– Remove the side vent from the dash panel on the driver's side
⇒ Heating, Air Conditioning; Rep. gr. 80 .
– Remove the side cover on the dash panel -1- on the driver's
side in -direction of arrow-.
– Remove the light switch
⇒ “2.1 Removing and installing light switch”, page 230 and the
headlight range control adjuster
⇒ “2.2 Removing and installing the headlight range control ad‐
juster”, page 230 .
Vehicles manufactured as of CW 51.2019 (facelift):

11. Mobile services online 115

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Remove the rivet -5- and unscrew the screws -2- on the left
side of the trim panel -1-.
– Rotate the left part of the panel -1- towards yourself.
All vehicles:
– Unlock and disconnect the plug of the control unit for emer‐
gency call module and communication unit - J949- .

– Push the retaining tab in direction of arrow -A- and then slide
the control unit for emergency call module and communication
unit - J949- -1- out of the bracket -2- in direction of arrow -B-.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– Slide the control
Protected unit into
by copyright. theforbracket
Copying up to thepurposes,
private or commercial stop until
in part the
or in whole, is not permitted
retaining tab locks into place, arrow -A-.
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

11.4 Removing and installing emergency call

button - E276-
Removing
– Removing the storage compartment in the headliner ⇒ Body
Work; Rep. gr. 68 .
– Use a small screwdriver to release the retaining clips -2- on
both sides and remove the emergency call button - E276- Pos.
-1-.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

116 Rep. gr.91 - Radio, telephone, navigation

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

11.5 Removing and installing speaker for

emergency call module - R335-
Removing
– Unclip cover with speaker -2- out of the centre console -1- us‐
ing the disassembly wedge and remove it, taking into account
the length of the connected cable.
– Release connector and remove it.

– Unscrew screws -1- and detach speaker for emergency call

module - R335- -2- from the cover -3-.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.
Tightening torques
Fixing screws for speakers 1.5 Nm

11.6 Replacing, adapting and activating con‐

Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
trol unit for emergency call module and
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

communication unit - J949-

⇒ “11.6.1 Replacing, adapting and activating control unit for emer‐
gency call module and communication unit J949 , vehicles for EU
countries except Russia and Belarus”, page 117
⇒ “11.6.2 Replacing, adapting and activating control unit for emer‐
gency call module and communication unit J949 , vehicles for
Russia and Belarus”, page 118

11.6.1 Replacing, adapting and activating con‐

trol unit for emergency call module and
communication unit - J949- , vehicles for
EU countries except Russia and Belarus
• Data for “targeted fault-finding” in ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester
current
Procedure when replacing:
– In Targeted fault finding or Targeted functions op‐
erating mode for the control unit for emergency call module
and communication unit - J949- , select the Commissioning/
replace function (address 0075) ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester.

– Follow the instructions on the ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester (in‐

cludes the steps: coding, parameterisation, adaptation to im‐
mobiliser).
– In Targeted fault finding or Targeted functions op‐
erating mode for the control unit for emergency call module

11. Mobile services online 117

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

and communication unit - J949- , select the Activate function

⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester.
– Exit Targeted fault-finding or Targeted functions .
– Remove ignition key (for vehicles with interface for entry and
start system, switch off ignition and open the driver's door for
at least 5 seconds).
– Disconnect ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester.
– Drive the vehicle out of the workshop to ensure GPS and GSM
signal reception (the GSM and GPS signal strength can be
read in the measured value block).
– Switch on the ignition and leave switched on for at least 10
minutes, but do not connect the vehicle diagnosis tester .
The status LED -1- is lit red after ignition is switched on.
When successfully activated after the communication profile has
been downloaded, the colour of the status LED -2- changes from
red to green as you wait.
– Checking the functions of the Škoda Connect services (see ⇒
Rapid Owner's Manual ). If they are not active, restart the in‐
fotainment unit (press the switch-on button/virtual switch-on
button on the display unit for approx. 15 seconds until the in‐
fotainment unit restarts).

11.6.2 Replacing, adapting and activating con‐

Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
trol unless
unit for emergency
authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. call
ŠKODAmodule and
AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
communication unit - J949- , vehicles for
Russia and Belarus
• Data for “targeted fault-finding” in ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester
current
Procedure when replacing:
– In Targeted fault finding or Targeted functions op‐
erating mode for the control unit for emergency call module
and communication unit - J949- , select the Transfer/re-
place function (address 0075) ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester.

– Follow the instructions on the ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester (in‐

cludes the steps: coding, parameterisation, adaptation to im‐
mobiliser).
– In Targeted fault finding or Targeted functions op‐
erating mode for the control unit for emergency call module
and communication unit - J949- , select the Activate function
⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester.
– Exit Targeted fault-finding or Targeted functions .
– Remove ignition key (for vehicles with interface for entry and
start system, switch off ignition and open the driver's door for
at least 5 seconds).
– Disconnect ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester.
– Drive the vehicle out of the workshop to ensure GPS and GSM
signal reception (the GSM and GPS signal strength can be
read in the measured value block).
– Switch on ignition.

118 Rep. gr.91 - Radio, telephone, navigation

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

The status LED -2- is lit red after ignition is switched on.
When successfully activated after the communication profile has
been downloaded (this may take up to 15 minutes or even longer,
depending on GPS and GSM signal strength), the colour of the
status LED -2- changes from red to green.
If the status LED -2- is green, the ERA Glonass system is activa‐
ted.
Each time the ignition key is disconnect and the ignition is then
switched on, the status LED lights up red and then, after approx.
5 seconds, switches to green.

Caution

After successful activation, connect the ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic

tester and read out the SIM ID number in the SIM card block
using the “Measured value blocks” (address 0075 - read meas‐
ured values) of the control unit for emergency call module and
communication unit - J949- . You must record this number
(nine digits) on the customer order. The customer should then
be informed that he/she must notify the road traffic authority
that the control unit for emergency
Protected call formodule
by copyright. Copying private or and communi‐
commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
cation unit - J949-unless
hasauthorised
been replaced
by ŠKODA AUTOandA.provide
S. ŠKODAthe AUTO authority
A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with the above SIMwith IDrespect
number to theto be entered
correctness in the
of information vehicle
in this da‐
document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

tabase.

11.7 Checking that the components and

communication of the ERA Glonass sys‐
tem are functioning

Note

♦ Applies to vehicles for Russia and Belarus.

♦ You can check that the individual components are working and
the ERA Glonass system is communicating with the ⇒ Vehicle
diagnostic tester or by performing the system self-test.
♦ To run the function test for the components and communica‐
tion, the ERA Glonass system must be activated.
♦ The ERA Glonass system is activated for the first time after
switching off transport mode (see ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet
Rapid ).

The self-test checks the following:

♦ OCU unit, SW integrity and realtime
♦ GNSS (GPS) aerial
♦ GSM aerial
♦ Microphone
♦ Loudspeaker
♦ Connection of the unit with other components (BUS commu‐
nication, airbag)
♦ Connection of HMI components
♦ Button in headliner
♦ Condition of the emergency battery

11. Mobile services online 119

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

Self-test of the components and communication of the ERA Glo‐

nass system
– Switch on ignition.
– Swivel out the cap cover for the SOS button -arrow- and press
the button -2- for approx. 3 seconds with a thin object (e.g. a
pin).
1- Emergency call button
2- LED warning light
3- Button for test start
– Pressing the button -2- activates the voice prompts for the test
sequence. The individual steps are confirmed by pressing the
button -1-.
– Also follow the voice prompts.
A voice prompt confirms if the test sequence has been completed
successfully.
Evaluate the test before switch off the ignition.
The test result is indicated by the type of flashing signals from the
warning light -3-.
Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
– After the ignition is switched
with respect off, the
to the correctness ERA Glonass
of information system
in this document. is by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
Copyright
reactivated and the warning light lights up green for a short
period (the warning light may light up green even if a fault has
been identified).

Evaluating the test:

Step Tested component/communica‐ Determined state LED warning light flashes
tion
0 ERA Glonass system No fault detected green
1 Vehicle identification number Vehicle identification number empty/ x1 green, x1 red
no configuration
2 Microphone Microphone not working x1 green, x2 red
3 Loudspeaker Speaker not working x1 green, x3 red
4 Button in headliner Button not working x1 green, x4 red
5 Airbag/crash sensors No signal x1 green, x5 red
6 Main GSM aerial No signal x1 green, x6 red
7 Reserve GSM aerial (if fitted) No signal x1 green, x7 red
8 GNSS (GPS) aerial No signal x1 green, x8 red
9 Mute signal Line interruption x1 green, x9 red
10 IVS internal error Internal IVS/SIM card/NAD not func‐ x1 green, x10 red
tioning correctly
11 Emergency battery Battery weak/defective x1 green, x11 red
12 Ignition Failure/interruption of ignition x1 green, x12 red

120 Rep. gr.91 - Radio, telephone, navigation

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

11.8 Replacing battery for control unit for

emergency call module and communi‐
cation unit - J949-

Caution

Discharged battery for Control unit for emergency call module

and communication unit - J949- as a result of the discharged
vehicle battery.
♦ When the vehicle battery is discharged, before replacing
the battery for Control unit for emergency call module and
communication unit - J949- connect a charger and let the
vehicle battery charge for at least 2 hours with the ignition
switched on.
♦ Then charge the battery for Control unit for emergency call
module and communication unit - J949- with the ⇒ Vehicle
diagnostic tester in the measured value block.

Note

If it is not possible to order the battery as an independent com‐

ponent in the service network, the Control unit for emergency call
module and communication unit - J949- replace.

Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
Caution unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

The battery is only replaced at the ESD workstation.

ESD workstation - VAS 6613- structure

1- Plug adapter for earthing module
2- Earthing module
3- ESD table mat
4- Wrist tape
Removing
– Remove the control unit for emergency call module and com‐
munication unit - J949- .
⇒ “11.3 Removing and installing control unit for emergency call
module and communication unit J949 ”, page 115

– Remove the screw -2- and remove the battery cover from the
control unit -1-.

11. Mobile services online 121

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Remove the battery -3-from the control unit -1-, taking into ac‐
count the connected cable length.

Caution

Risk of damage to the electronic plate.

♦ When removing and connecting the plug, proceed slowly
and carefully.

– Carefully disconnect plug connection -2-.

Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.
Tightening torques
Component Tightening torque
Battery cover 0.5 Nm

122 Rep. gr.91 - Radio, telephone, navigation

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

92 – Windscreen wash/wipe system

1 Windscreen washer system
⇒ “1.1 Removing and installing washer fluid reservoir, washer flu‐
id pumps and sensor for washer fluid level”, page 123
⇒ “1.2 Removing and installing the spray nozzles for windscreen
washer system”, page 124
⇒ “1.3 Repairing washer fluid lines”, page 125

1.1 Removing and installing washer fluid

reservoir, washer fluid pumps and sen‐
sor for washer fluid level
Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Slacken the front part of the right wheelhouse liner ⇒ Body
Work; Rep. gr. 66 .
– Release plug from the washer fluid pumps for windscreen
-6-, for headlight -9- and from sensor for washer fluid level
-1-.
– To unlock, turn the locking clip on the hose connections -3-
(black marking - front windscreen washer), -5- (white marking
- rear windscreen washer) and disconnect the connections
from the washer fluid pump -4-. Collect the flowing out washer
fluid in a suitable vessel.
– To unlock press the securing clamp and pull off hose with
couplingProtected
-8- from the washer
by copyright. fluid
Copying for pump
private for headlight
or commercial purposes, in-7-.
part or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
– If necessary slide the washer fluid pumps out of the washer
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

fluid reservoir to the top (turn the washer fluid pump for head‐
light -7- approx. 90° before sliding out) and remove the sensor
for the washer fluid level -1-.
– Remove front bumper ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 63 .
– Remove cap from reservoir supports.

– Push the reservoir support -4- out of the holder -3-.

– Push out the clamp -5- -arrow-.
– Unscrew nut -1- and remove reservoir -2-.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– Hoses with angled pieces must click audibly into the connec‐
tions on the washer fluid pumps.
Tightening torques
Fixing nuts for reservoir 8 Nm

1. Windscreen washer system 123

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

1.2 Removing and installing the spray noz‐

zles for windscreen washer system
Removing
Variant 1:
– Press the nozzle upwards in direction of arrow -A- and unhook
from the front flap in direction of arrow -B-.

– Unlock by pulling out the locking clip -3- and detach the hose
connection -2- from the spray nozzle.
– Disconnect the plug connection -1- of the heated nozzles.

Variant 2:
– Tilt the nozzle out of the front flap -arrow- and remove.

– Pull out the locking clip -arrow- and separate hose with angular
piece -1-.
– Unplug the connector from the heated spray nozzle -2-.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– Adjust the spray nozzles ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet Rapid .

124 Rep. gr.92 - Windscreen wash/wipe system

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

1.3 Repairing washer fluid lines

All the notes and comments for this chapter can be found in the
Workshop Manual ⇒ Electrical System - General notes; Rep. gr.
92 . If a note cannot be accessed, open the Workshop Manual
“Electrical System - General Notes” manually in “ELSA”, Section
“92”.

1. Windscreen washer system 125

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

2 Windscreen wiper and washer sys‐

tem
⇒ “2.1 Removing and installing the wiper arms with wiper blades
and setting their final setting”, page 126
⇒ “2.2 Removing and installing wiper motor with linkage”,
page 127
⇒ “2.3 Removing and installing windscreen wiper motor from link‐
age”, page 128
⇒ “2.4 Removing and installing sensor for rain and light detection
G397 , vehicles up to CW 21.2015”, page 129
⇒ “2.5 Removing and installing sensor for rain and light detection
G397 , vehicles from CW 22.2015”, page 130

2.1 Removing and installing the wiper arms

with wiper blades and setting their final
setting
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Extractor for wiper arms - T10369/1-
Removing
– Use a screwdriver to lever off the two caps for nuts on the wiper
arms.
– Unscrew the nuts -arrows-.

– Push the extractor for wiper arms - T10369/1- , Pos. -2-, onto
the arm, as shown in the illustration.

Note

To release the windscreen wiper arms, always use the thrust

piece -3- in order to avoid damage to the thread of the wiper motor
shaft.

– Release the wiper arm -4- from the shaft by turning

Protected the pres‐
by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
sure screw -1-. with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

Installing
– Switch wiper motor on and off and run until it is in park position.
– Position the wiper arms (shorter wiper arm on the driver's side)
so that:

126 Rep. gr.92 - Windscreen wash/wipe system

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

On the driver's side, there must be a distance -A- of 28 +1/-3 mm

between the upper lip of the wiper blade and the upper edge of
the plenum chamber cover.

On the front passenger side, there must be a distance -B- of 27

±2 mm between the upper lip of the wiper blade and the upper
edge of the plenum chamber cover.
– Slightly tighten fixing nuts.
– Operate the flick wipe, if necessary align wiper arms once
again and tighten the securing nuts.
Tightening torques
Fixing nut for wiper arms 21 Nm

Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
2.2 Removing and installing wiper motor
with linkage
Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Remove wiper arms with wiper blades
⇒ “2.1 Removing and installing the wiper arms with wiper
blades and setting their final setting”, page 126 .
– Remove plenum chamber cover ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 66 .
– Remove bulkhead ⇒ Body work; Rep. gr. 50 .
– Unscrew securing bolts -arrows-.
– Unplug connector -1- at wiper motor.
– Push the wiper motor with the linkage -2- towards the engine
and remove.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:

2. Windscreen wiper and washer system 127

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– When installing, insert the rig pin -2- into the rubber bearing
-1-.
Tightening torques
Fixing screws for wiper motor with linkage 7 Nm

2.3 Removing and installing windscreen

wiper motor from linkage
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Disassembly tool for door panel - T10236-
Removing
– Removing wiper motor with linkage
⇒ “2.2 Removing and installing wiper motor with linkage”, page
127 .
– Use a removal tool -2- to lever off the rod -1- from joint holder
-arrow-.

– Unscrew fixing screws -arrows- and remove the wiper motor

with control unit from the mounting frame.

128 Rep. gr.92 - Windscreen wash/wipe system

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

Installing

Note

Lever -2- is attached to the motor shaft -1- and cannot be disas‐
sembled. The lever position is not configured.

– Press rod -1- onto the joint holder -arrow-.

Tightening torques
Fixing screws for wiper motor 8 Nm
Fixing nuts for crank on wiper motor 18 Nm

2.4 Removing and installing sensor for rain

and light detection - G397- , vehicles up
to CW 21.2015

Caution

If the sensor for rain and light detection - G397- is removed

from the retaining plate on the windscreen (e.g. when changing
the windscreen), it can be subsequently installed again. Store
the removed sensor dust-free until it is installed again and
make sure that the silicone coupling cushion does not get dirty.

Removing
– Switch off all electrical components and take out the ignition
key.
– Removing interior rear-view mirror ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 68 .
– Disconnect plug -1- from sensor -2-.

2. Windscreen wiper and washer system 129

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Lever the sensor -1- carefully and slowly from the retaining
plate -2- at the recess -3- using a suitable cross-head screw‐
driver.

Note

When removing, make sure to lever off the complete sensor and
not only the upper shell of the sensor.

Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:

Caution

♦ Thoroughly clean the windscreen inside the retaining plate

with e.g. isopropyl (technical alcohol).
♦ The surface (coupling cushion) of the sensor must not get
dirty or damaged when installing. A sensor with a dam‐
aged coupling cushion must be replaced.

Note

If the surface (coupling cushion) of the sensor is dirty, it can be

cleaned, if necessary, by sticking on one or several adhesive
tapes and then pulling them off again.

– If necessary, remove the protective cap of the new sensor.

– Insert the sensor -1- into the retaining plate on the windscreen
-2- and press firmly.

Note

♦ Even after correct installation of the sensor, smaller air bub‐

bles can be present initially between the windscreen and the
coupling cushion. The contact surface must be free of bubbles
after approx. 10 minutes.
♦ When replacing, the new sensor must be coded with the ⇒ Ve‐
hicle diagnostic tester.

2.5 Removing and installing sensor for rain

and light detection - G397- , vehicles
from CW 22.2015 Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
Different sensor variants are installed for different versions (see
⇒ ETKA - “Electronic Catalogue of Original Parts” )
Removing

Note

To facilitate removal, turn the mirror as necessary.

– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!

130 Rep. gr.92 - Windscreen wash/wipe system

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Remove sensor covers and interior mirror ⇒ General body

repairs; Rep. gr. 68 .
– Unlock and pull off connector -3-.
– Insert a tight screwdriver -5- into the opening as shown in the
figure and unlock the retaining clamps -2- -arrows-.

Note

After releasing the retaining clip, you must wait at least 1 minute
so that the silicone base is fully released.

– Carefully detach the sensor -4- with lateral movements and

remove it from the bearing -1-.

Caution

Risk of damaging the humidity encoder!

♦ The humidity encoder -arrow- on the sensor -1- is very
sensitive and must not be damaged.
♦ If the humidity sender -arrow- is damaged, the encoder
-1- must be replaced.

Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:

Caution

♦ Clean the windscreen inside the plate thoroughly with e.g.

Isopropanol (technical alcohol) see ⇒ Electronic Catalog
of Original Parts “ETKA” . Coupling cushion residues that
may be stuck to the pane must be removed completely.
♦ There are several variants of sensors (depending on
equipment). Ensure that the correct component is used for
replacement, see ⇒ Electronic Catalogue of Original Parts
“ETKA” .

When installing a new sensor for rain and light detection:

2. Windscreen wiper and washer system 131

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Press the catch pegs in the direction of the arrows -A- and
remove cover -1- in direction of arrow -B-.

Note

Pull off the shielding cap immediately before installation so that

the coupling cushion is not contaminated.

When installing the originally installed sensor for rain and light
detection:

– Carefully remove the silicone cushion -2- or the residues from

the sensor -1- -Arrow-.

Caution

The surface of the sensor must be completely free of coupling

cushion residues.

– Clean sensor surface with cleaning solution, see ⇒ Electronic

Catalogue of Original Parts “ETKA” .

– Remove the silicone paper -3- from the cushion -2-.

• Transparent protective foil -1- stays on the cushion -2- to begin
with as assembly film.

– Centre the coupling cushion -2- with protective film -1- on the
sensor -3-.

132 Rep. gr.92 - Windscreen wash/wipe system

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Press the cushion onto the sensor -2- through the transparent
foil -1-, so that there are no bubbles between the foil and sen‐
sor.

– Carefully pull the transparent protective foil -1- off the cushion
-2-.
Continued for all variants:

– Insert the sensor -4- into the retaining frame on the windscreen
-2-.
• For correct function, the sensor must rest against the wind‐
screen with no dirt
Protected or bubbles
by copyright. onprivate
Copying for the orentire surface.
commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
– Press the retaining
with respect toclip until theoflatches
the correctness -1-
information and
in this -5- audibly
document. lock
Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
into place.
– Connect connector -3-.
– When replacing, the new sensor must be coded with the ⇒ Ve‐
hicle diagnostic tester.

2. Windscreen wiper and washer system 133

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

3 Rear window wiper and washer sys‐

tem
⇒ “3.1 Removing and installing the wiper arm with wiper blade
and setting its final setting”, page 134
⇒ “3.2 Removing and installing windscreen wiper motor”,
page 135
⇒ “3.3 Replacing and adjusting the spray nozzle. ”, page 136

3.1 Removing and installing the wiper arm

with wiper blade and setting its final set‐
ting
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Extractor for wiper arms - T10369/1-
Removing
– Unclip the cap -1- from the retaining tabs and fold down.
– Carefully push out the nozzle -2- -arrow- (not valid for Space‐
back type).
– Release the fixing nut by one turn.
Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

– Place an M6 nut -2- on the fixing nut (does not apply to Space‐
back model).
– Using a standard commercially available small two-arm ex‐
tractor -1-, undo the wiper arm -3- from the shaft.
– Unscrew nut and remove wiper arm.
Installing
– When the ignition is switched on, switch wiper motor on and
off and run until it is in park position.
– Position wiper arm with wiper blade and loosely secure with
nuts.
– Set final position of wiper arm in accordance with the figure.
The value -a- is:

Rapid 42±2 mm

134 Rep. gr.92 - Windscreen wash/wipe system

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

Rapid Spaceback
Version -I- 183±2 mm
Version -II- 52±2 mm
– Tighten the fixing nuts.
– Perform a functional and setting check.
Tightening torques
Fixing nuts for wiper arms 12 Nm

3.2 Removing and installing windscreen

wiper motor
Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Remove wiper arm with wiper blade
⇒ “3.1 Removing and installing the wiper arm with wiper blade
and setting its final setting”, page 134 .
Rapid:
– Lever the cover -1- out of the catches and remove.
Rapid Spaceback:
– Remove the tailgate trim panel.
Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

– Remove rivets -2-, unclip cover -1- -arrows- and remove.

3. Rear window wiper and washer system 135

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

All vehicles:
– Unplug connector -3- at wiper motor.
– To unlock, turn the locking clip at the hose connection and
detach hose -2- for spray nozzle.
– Unscrew nuts -arrows- and remove wiper motor -1-.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– Take fitting position of implementation into account:

Rapid:
– Recess in the rear window implementation-arrow- is located
at the bottom, from the inside.

Rapid Spaceback:
– The recess in the rear window implementation -arrow- is lo‐
cated at the top, from the outside.
Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
– Set end position of wiper arm with wiper blade
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
⇒ “3.1 Removing and installing the wiper arm with wiper blade
and setting its final setting”, page 134 .
Tightening torques
Fixing nuts for wiper arms 8 Nm

3.3 Replacing and adjusting the spray noz‐

zle.
⇒ “3.3.1 Replacing and adjusting the spray nozzle - Rapid”, page
136
⇒ “3.3.2 Replacing and adjusting the spray nozzle - Rapid Space‐
back”, page 137

3.3.1 Replacing and adjusting the spray noz‐

zle - Rapid

Note

If the spray field is uneven due to impurities within the spray noz‐
zle, remove the spray nozzle and clean it with water against the
spraying direction. Purging the nozzle with compressed air
against the spraying direction is then permitted. Do not use any
objects for cleaning spray jets!

136 Rep. gr.92 - Windscreen wash/wipe system

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

Remove nozzle
– Unclip the cap -1- from the retaining tabs and fold down.
– Carefully push out the nozzle -2- -arrow-.
Installing
– Run wiper until it is in park position, insert the spray nozzle in
the correct position in the wiper motor shaft and subsequently
adjust ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet Rapid .

3.3.2 Replacing and adjusting the spray noz‐

zle - Rapid Spaceback

Note

Remove nozzle
– Remove lamp for high level brake light
⇒ “9.1.2 Removing and installing the high level brake light -
Rapid Spaceback”, page 189 .
– Unlock the latches -arrows- and remove the spray nozzle -1-
out of the light towards the rear.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– Press the nozzle into the assembly opening until it audibly
locks into place.
Check proper operation after installing.

Note

The nozzle is not configured. If the spray field is uneven due to

impurities within the spray nozzle, remove the spray nozzle and
clean it with water against the spraying direction. Purging the
nozzle with compressed air against the spraying direction is then
permitted. Do not use any objects for cleaning spray jets!
Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

3. Rear window wiper and washer system 137

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

4 Headlamp cleaning system

⇒ “4.1 Removing and installing headlight cleaning system pump
V11 ”, page 138
⇒ “4.2 Removing and installing the lift cylinder for the headlight
cleaning system”, page 138
⇒ “4.3 Bleed the headlamp cleaning system”, page 138

4.1 Removing and installing headlight

cleaning system pump - V11-
The removal and installation of the pump is described in
⇒ “1 Windscreen washer system”, page 123 .
After installing the pump bleed the headlamp cleaning system
⇒ “4.3 Bleed the headlamp cleaning system”, page 138 .

4.2 Removing and installing the lift cylinder

for the headlight cleaning system
– Pull the spray nozzles with cover slightly out of the bumper by
uniformly gripping on both sides of the cover, then grip the
spray nozzles and pull out up to the stop.
– Unclip the cover -1- from the bearing -arrows-.
– Remove front bumper ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 63 .

– Press off the catches arrows -A- using a small screwdriver and
push the lift cylinder -1- out of the bumper arrow -B-.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– Push the lift cylinder into the brackets in the bumper until it
clicks audibly into place.
– Hoses with angled pieces must click audibly into the connec‐
tions on the lift cylinders for spray nozzles.
– Install bumper.
– After completing the assembly work bleed the headlamp
cleaning system
⇒ “4.3 Bleed the headlamp cleaning system”, page 138 .

4.3 Bleed the headlamp cleaning system

After installation or for initial setup, the headlamp cleaning system
must be bled to guarantee a perfect operation.
– Fill washer fluid reservoir and headlight washer reservoir.
– Start engine.
– Switch on headlight.

138 Rep. gr.92 - Windscreen wash/wipe system

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Operate headlamp cleaning system several times (3 -5 pulses

for an operating duration of each 3 s).
– If necessary repeat this bleeding procedure until a perfect
functioning of the lift cylinders for headlamp cleaning system
and for spray nozzles is achieved.

4. Headlamp cleaning system 139

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

94 – Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior

1 Headlights – halogen headlights
⇒ “1.1 Summary of components, halogen headlight”, page 140
⇒ “1.2 Removing and installing headlight”, page 144
⇒ “1.3 Removing and installing bulb H7 for low beam lights”, page
145
⇒ “1.4 Remove and install H15 bulbs for daytime running lights
and high beam”, page 146
⇒ “1.5 Removing and installing the bulb for main beam”,
page 147
⇒ “1.6 Removing and installing the side light bulb W5W ”,
page 149
⇒ “1.7 Removing and installing the light bulb for the turn signal
light”, page 150
⇒ “1.8 Removing and installing headlight range control motor”,
page 151
⇒ “1.9 Replace headlight fixing brackets”, pageProtected
153 by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
⇒ “1.10 Removing and installing LED module”,unless
page authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
154to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
with respect

⇒ “1.11 Change headlight for right-hand and/or left-hand traffic”,

page 156
⇒ “1.12 Setting the headlight beam”, page 157

1.1 Summary of components, halogen

headlight
⇒ “1.1.1 Assembly overview, halogen headlights, vehicles man‐
ufactured until CW 21.2017”, page 140
⇒ “1.1.2 Assembly overview, halogen headlights, vehicles man‐
ufactured from CW 22.2017 until CW 50.2019”, page 142
⇒ “1.1.3 Assembly overview - halogen headlights as of CW
51.2019 (facelift)”, page 143

1.1.1 Assembly overview, halogen headlights, vehicles manufactured until CW

21.2017

140 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

1 - Headlight housing
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “1.2 Removing and in‐
stalling headlight”,
page 144
❑ Adjust
⇒ “1.12 Setting the
headlight beam”,
page 157
❑ Replace attachment
brackets
⇒ “1.9 Replace head‐
light fixing brackets”,
page 153
❑ Change headlights for
right-hand and/or left-
hand traffic
⇒ “1.11 Change head‐
light for right-hand and/
or left-hand traffic”,
page 156
2 - Light bulb for low beam light
❑ H7
❑ Replace
⇒ “1.3 Removing and in‐
stalling bulb H7 for low
beam lights”, page 145
3 - Rubber cap
4 - Headlight range control mo‐
tor
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “1.8.1 Remove and in‐
stall headlight range
control motor on vehi‐
cles manufactured up to
CW 50.2019”,
page 151
5 - Plastic cap
6 - Rubber cap
7 - Light bulb for daylight driving light and main beam
❑ H15
❑ Replace ⇒ “1.4 Remove and install H15 bulbs for daytime running lights and high beam”, page 146
8 - Light bulb for the parking light
❑ W5W Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
❑ Replace ⇒ “1.6 Removing and installingwith
therespect
sidetolight bulb W5W
the correctness ”, page
of information in this149
document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

9 - Clamping device
10 - Light bulb for the turn signal light
❑ PY21W
❑ Replace ⇒ “1.7.1 Removing and installing indicator bulb from CW 50.2019”, page 150

1. Headlights – halogen headlights 141

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

1.1.2 Assembly overview, halogen headlights, vehicles manufactured from CW

22.2017 until CW 50.2019

1 - Screws
❑ 1.5 Nm
2 - Cover
3 - LED module
❑ Controls the daytime
running light and park‐
ing light function
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “1.10.1 Removing and
installing LED module,
vehicles produced up to
CW 50.2019”,
page 154
4 - Screws
❑ 3.5 Nm
5 - Hollow screw
❑ Adjusting element for
exact position adjust‐
ment of the headlight in
the body
6 - Headlight housing
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “1.2 Removing and in‐
stalling headlight”,
page 144
❑ Adjust
⇒ “1.12 Setting the
headlight beam”,
page 157
❑ Replace attachment
brackets
⇒ “1.9 Replace head‐
light fixing brackets”,
page 153
❑ No headlight adjustment for right or left traffic
7 - Headlight range control motor
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “1.8.1 Remove and install headlight range control motor on vehicles manufactured up to CW 50.2019”,
page 151
8 - Light bulb for low beam light
❑ H7
❑ Replace ⇒ “1.3 Removing and installing bulb H7 for low beam lights”, page 145
9 - Rubber cap unless
Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
10 - Plastic cap
11 - Lamp socket for the turn signal light
12 - Light bulb for the turn signal light
❑ PY21W
❑ Replace ⇒ “1.7.1 Removing and installing indicator bulb from CW 50.2019”, page 150

142 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

13 - Rubber cap
14 - Light bulb for main beam
❑ H7
❑ Replace
⇒ “1.5.1 Remove and install H7 bulb for high beam on vehicles manufactured up to CW 50.2019”, page
147

1.1.3 Assembly overview - halogen headlights as of CW 51.2019 (facelift)

Detailed summary of components and functional description of
the headlights:
♦ ⇒ Operating instructions Rapid
♦ ⇒ Electronic Catalogue of Original Parts “ETKA”

Note

The headlight wiring loom spare part is only used as a source for spare parts (e.g. connector, fitting etc.). It
therefore cannot be replaced completely in the headlight.

1 - Screw
❑ 1.5 Nm
2 - Cover for adjustment ele‐
ment
3 - Setting element
❑ no spare part
4 - Screw
❑ 3 pieces
❑ 3.5 ± 0.5 Nm
5 - Hollow screw
❑ Adjusting element for
exact position adjust‐
ment of the headlight in
the body
6 - Light bulb for main beam
❑ H7
❑ Replace
⇒ “1.5.2 Removal and
installation of H7 lamp
for high beam, vehicles
Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
manufacturedunlessfrom CW
authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
51.2019”, page 148
7 - Cover
8 - Screw
❑ 2 pieces
❑ 2 Nm
9 - LED module
❑ For low beam, daytime
running light and side
light function
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “1.10.2 Removing and installing LED module, vehicles produced from CW 51.2019”, page 155

1. Headlights – halogen headlights 143

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

10 - Cover
❑ LED module
11 - Screw
❑ 2 pieces
❑ 1.5 Nm
12 - Cover
13 - Headlight range control motor
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “1.8.2 Removal and installation of headlight range control motor, vehicles manufactured from CW
51.2019”, page 152
14 - Holder for actuator for headlight range control
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “1.8.2 Removal and installation of headlight range control motor, vehicles manufactured from CW
51.2019”, page 152
15 - Screw
❑ 2 pieces
❑ 1.5 Nm
16 - Bulb for flashing light with socket
❑ PWY24W
❑ Replace ⇒ “1.7.2 Removing and installing indicator light bulb from CW 51.2019”, page 150
17 - Headlight housing
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “1.2 Removing and installing headlight”, page 144
❑ Adjust ⇒ “1.12 Setting the headlight beam”, page 157
❑ Replace attachment brackets ⇒ “1.9 Replace headlight fixing brackets”, page 153

1.2 Removing and installing headlight

Removing

Note

♦ The procedure for removal and installing illustrates the left

headlight as an example. The procedure for removal and in‐
stalling is identical for the right headlight.
♦ For an easier fitting of the headlight, mark its position in a suit‐
able manner (e.g. with marker, adhesive tape) before slack‐
ening the screws.

– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!

Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
– Remove front bumper ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 63 .
– Release screws -arrows-.
– Disconnect plug and remove headlight -1-.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– Align the headlight according to the contours of the vehicle
body (maintain the gap size ⇒ Body Repairs; Rep. gr. 00 ) and
loosely tighten with screws.
– Install bumper.

144 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– By turning -arrows- the setting elements -A-, the headlight is

moved and thereby fitted to the surrounding body parts.
– Subsequently tighten the fixing screws -B- and then the screw
-C-.

Note

The setting element is aligned automatically when tightening the

screw -C-.

– Set up the headlight

⇒ “1.12 Setting the headlight beam”, page 157 .
Tightening torques
Headlight fixing screws 3.5 Nm

1.3 Removing and installing bulb “H7” for

low beam lights

WARNING Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
These H7 bulbs are pressurised and can explode when chang‐
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
ing the bulb - risk of injury! Wear gloves and safety spectacles
when changing the lamps.

Note

♦ Do not touch the glass when changing the light bulb. The re‐
maining finger print would evaporate through the heat of the
switched on bulb and condense on the reflector, which impairs
the luminosity of the headlight.
♦ When installing the rubber cap, pay attention to the correct
fitting. Water ingress destroys the headlight.
♦ Switch off the ignition and all electrical components before
changing the bulb.
♦ On vehicles with diesel engines, the fuel filter and its holder
must be removed and placed to the side in order to facilitate
an easier access to the right bulb. Do not separate the hoses.
♦ The cover in the wheelhouse liner can also be removed in or‐
der to facilitate an easier access to the bulb.

Removing
– Remove rubber cap for headlight -2-.

1. Headlights – halogen headlights 145

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Release and remove the bulb -1- from the catches by pendular
movement and pulling force -arrows-.
– Remove connector -2-.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

1.4 Remove and install “H15” bulbs for day‐

time running lights and high beam

WARNING

These H15 bulbs are pressurised and can explode when

changing the bulb - risk of injury! Wear gloves and safety spec‐
tacles when changing the lamps.

Note

Removing
– Left side - remove the battery to get better access to the bulb
⇒ “1.6 Removing and installing battery”, page 13 .
– Remove rubber cap for headlight -1-.

146
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Turn the bulb -1- to the left -arrow- and remove from the head‐
light housing.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

1.5 Removing and installing the bulb for

main beam
⇒ “1.5.1 Remove and install H7 bulb for high beam on vehicles
manufactured up to CW 50.2019”, page 147
⇒ “1.5.2 Removal and installation of H7 lamp for high beam, ve‐
hicles manufactured from CW 51.2019”, page 148
Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted

1.5.1 Remove and install “H7”withbulb for high of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
respect to the correctness

beam on vehicles manufactured up to

CW 50.2019

WARNING

These H7 bulbs are pressurised and can explode when chang‐

ing the bulb - risk of injury! Wear gloves and safety spectacles
when changing the lamps.

Note

Removing
– Remove rubber cap for headlight -1-.

1. Headlights – halogen headlights 147

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Release and remove the bulb -1- from the catches by pendular
movement and pulling force -arrows-.
– Remove connector -2-.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

1.5.2 Removal and installation of H7 lamp for

high beam, vehicles manufactured from
CW 51.2019

WARNING

The H7 light bulb is pressurized and can burst when changing

the bulb.
It is recommended to wear gloves and safety glasses when
changing bulbs.

Caution

Do not touch the glass when installing the light

Protected bulb.Copying
by copyright. Yourforfin‐
private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
gers will leave traces of grease on the glass
unless which
authorised thenAUTO
by ŠKODA evap‐ A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
orate when the bulb is switched on causing it to cloud.
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

When installing the cover, pay attention to the correct fitting.

Water ingress destroys the headlight.

Removing
– Remove cover -2-.

148 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Press catch in direction of arrow -A- and unscrew mount -2-

with the lamp -1- in direction of arrow -B-.
– Remove defective light bulb -1-from the socket -2- and re‐
place.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

1.6 Removing and installing the side light

bulb “W5W”

Note

♦ Do not touch the glass bulb with bare hands when changing
the bulb, use clean material gloves. The remaining finger print
would evaporate through the heat of the switched on bulb and
condense on the reflector, which impairs the luminosity of the
headlight.
♦ When installing the rubber cap, pay attention to the correct
fitting. Water ingress destroys the headlight.
♦ Switch off the ignition and all electrical components before
changing the bulb.

Removing
– Remove rubber cap -1-.

– Slacken the bulb holder -1- by pendular movement and pulling

force -arrow-.
– Remove the bulb from the socket.
Installing
– After replacing the bulb, press socket fully into the headlight.
– Position rubber cap.

1. Headlights – halogen headlights 149

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

1.7 Removing and installing the light bulb for

the turn signal light
⇒ “1.7.1 Removing and installing indicator bulb from CW
50.2019”, page 150
⇒ “1.7.2 Removing and installing indicator light bulb from CW
51.2019”, page 150

1.7.1 Removing and installing indicator bulb

from CW 50.2019

Note

♦ Do not touch the glass bulb with bare hands when changing
the bulb, use clean material gloves. The remaining finger print
would evaporate through the heat of the switched on bulb and
condense on the reflector, which impairs the luminosity of the
headlight.
♦ Switch off the ignition and all electrical components before
changing the bulb.

Removing
– Turn the socket -4- towards the left and remove.
– Replace defective light bulb.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

1.7.2 Removing and installing indicator light

bulb from CW 51.2019
Applies to the Halogen headlight.

Caution

Do not touch the glass when installing the light bulb. Your fin‐
gers will leave traces of grease on the glass which then evap‐
orate when the bulb is switched on causing it to cloud.
When installing the cover, pay attention to the correct fitting.
Water ingress destroys the headlight.

Removing
– Remove the cover from the wheel arch by turning in the di‐
rection of the arrow -A- -1-.

– Turn the socket with light bulb -1- in direction of arrow -A-.
– Remove the light bulb with socket -1- in direction of arrow
-B-. Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
– Removewith
defective light
respect to the bulb offrom
correctness the in
information socket and Copyright
this document. replace.by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

1.8 Removing and installing headlight range

control motor
⇒ “1.8.1 Remove and install headlight range control motor on ve‐
hicles manufactured up to CW 50.2019”, page 151
⇒ “1.8.2 Removal and installation of headlight range control mo‐
tor, vehicles manufactured from CW 51.2019”, page 152

1.8.1 Remove and install headlight range con‐

trol motor on vehicles manufactured up
to CW 50.2019
Removing
– Remove headlight with defective control motor
⇒ “1.2 Removing and installing headlight”, page 144 .

1. Headlights – halogen headlights 151

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Turn the cover to the left -3- and remove, also remove the
cover -1- for purposes of presentation.

– Detach the control motor -1- by turning it to the left in direction

of arrow -A- (left headlight), or to the right (right headlight).
– Disconnect plug.
– Slide thrust piece -2- out of the support by tilting it out to the
side in direction of arrow -B- and remove the control motor
-1- in direction of arrow -C-.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:

Note

When installing the caps, pay attention to the correct fitting. Water
ingress destroys the headlight.

– Inspect proper operation.

– Adjust headlight ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet Rapid .

1.8.2 Removal and installation of headlight

range control motor, vehicles manufac‐
tured from CW 51.2019
Removing
– Remove headlight with defective control motor
⇒ “1.2 Removing and installing headlight”, page 144 .
– Remove cover -1-.

152 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Remove connector -1-.

– Unscrew screws -3-.
– Swivel the holder -2- with actuator -4- in the direction of the
arrow -A- and remove in the direction of the arrow -B-.

– Turn the actuator -2- in the direction of the arrow -A- and in the
direction of the arrow -B- Remove from the holder -1-.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:

Caution

When installing the cover, pay attention to the correct fitting.

Water ingress destroys the headlight.

– Inspect proper operation.

– Adjust headlight ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet Rapid .
Tightening torques
♦ ⇒ “1.1.3 Assembly overview - halogen headlights as of CW
51.2019 (facelift)”, page 143

1.9 Replace headlight fixing brackets

If the outer headlight fixing brackets are broken or damaged, they
can be replaced by installing the repair kit. The complete head‐
light must not be replaced.

Note Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
♦ Before repairs check if the headlight has no other damage, as
the repair would be senseless.
♦ The replacement brackets can be ordered separately see ⇒
Electronic Catalogue of Original Parts “ETKA” .
♦ Before repairs the headlight must be removed.
♦ After installing the headlight, adjust the headlight
⇒ “1.12 Setting the headlight beam”, page 157 .

1. Headlights – halogen headlights 153

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

Screw adjusting nut into the new bracket:

If no set screw -2- is installed in the new claw, a set screw must
be screwed into the new claw -1-.
The adjusting screw -2- is designed to tap the thread in the new
bracket.
The adjusting screw must be screwed into the bracket exactly
straight, otherwise there is a risk that the new bracket will break.
To screw the adjusting screw -2- into the new bracket -1- accu‐
rately, use e.g. the vice jaws. (Use e.g. the hex socket -4- from
the tool set for support on one side. On the other side, use e.g. a
piece of pipe, a washer, or screw etc. Pos. -3-.
Slowly screw the adjusting screw into the new bracket, which
slowly tightening the vice jaws (a second mechanic is required for
this step).
– Remove the original headlight fixing bracket, in order to install
a new fixing bracket from the repair kit -see fig.-.

Variant 1:

Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
Variant 2: unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
– Insert a new bracket -arrows- in the correct way and tighten
the fixing screws.
Tightening torques
Fixing screws for bracket 1.5 Nm

1.10 Removing and installing LED module

⇒ “1.10.1 Removing and installing LED module, vehicles pro‐
duced up to CW 50.2019”, page 154
⇒ “1.10.2 Removing and installing LED module, vehicles pro‐
duced from CW 51.2019”, page 155

1.10.1 Removing and installing LED module,

vehicles produced up to CW 50.2019
Controls the daytime running light and parking light function.
Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!

154 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Remove headlight
⇒ “1.2 Removing and installing headlight”, page 144 .
– Remove screws -arrows- and cover with LED module -1- from
the headlamp, taking into account the connected cable
lengths.
– Release connector and remove it.

– Unscrew the screws, arrows -A- and LED module -1- From the
detents, arrows -B-.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

1.10.2 Removing and installing LED module,

vehicles produced from CW 51.2019
Halogen headlights - controls the headlight functions.
FULL LED headlight - controls the foglight/cornering light func‐
tion.
Removing
– Remove headlight
⇒ “1.2 Removing and installing headlight”, page 144 .
– Remove the screws -arrows- and remove the bracket with LED
module -1-.
– Release connector and remove it.

1. Headlights – halogen headlights 155

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Remove the screws, arrows -A- and module -1- from the de‐
tents, arrows -B-.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:

Caution

When installing the holder with the module, correctly fit the
seal. Water ingress destroys the headlight.

Tightening torques
♦ ⇒ “1.1.3 Assembly overview - halogen headlights as of CW
51.2019 (facelift)”, page 143

1.11 Change headlight for right-hand and/or

left-hand traffic
The halogen headlights should have self-adhesive foil glued over
them when driving in countries which drive on the right or the left
thereby preventing blinding of the drivers travelling in the opposite
direction.

Note

♦ For vehicles from CW 22/2017 there is no headlamp adjust‐

ment for right and left traffic, see
⇒ “1.1.2 Assembly overview, halogen headlights, vehicles
manufactured from CW 22.2017 until CW 50.2019”,
page 142 and
⇒ “1.1.3 Assembly overview - halogen headlights as of CW
51.2019 (facelift)”, page 143
♦ The change of the headlights is not suitable for the permanent
mode, rather only as a brief “touristic” solution during a tem‐
porary journey abroad.
♦ Both headlights must always be changed.
♦ The lenses must be cleared of dirt and de-greased, e.g. with
degreased white spirit solution, before sticking the foil.
♦ When cleaning and gluing foils, the lens must remain cold for
safety reasons.
♦ The instructions “right” and/or “left” on the protective foils al‐
ways refer to the front visibility towards the outside.
♦ Ensure that the correct protective foil is chosen, see ⇒ Elec‐
tronic Catalogue of Original Parts“ETKA” .

– Remove the rear protective foil.

– Place the foil on the headlight in such a way that the lower and
outer vertical edge of the auxiliary part of the foil is offset with
the bottom edge of the lens and the vertical auxiliary contour
on the headlight panes, see Fig.
1- The headlight on the right
2- The headlight on the left Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

156 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

Left-hand drive:

Right-hand drive:
– Forcefully press on the middle area of the foil -B-.
– Carefully pull off the auxiliary part of the foil -A- from the head‐
light.
Only the non-transparent part of the protective foil remains on the
lens -B-.

Note

Inform the customer about the corresponding notes for removing

the residual adhesive after pulling off the protective foil, e.g. tex‐
tiles soaked in isopropyl alcohol (do not use any aggressive
solvent, which can damage the polycarbonate lenses).

1.12 Setting the headlight beam

Note

Use a headlight beam setting device for setting the headlight

beam. The nominal values and the adjustment procedure can be
found in the Manual ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet Rapid .

1. Headlights – halogen headlights 157

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

2 Headlights with Xenon discharge

lamps
⇒ “2.1 Summary of components, headlights with Xenon discharge
lamps”, page 158
⇒ “2.2 Removing and installing headlight”, page 161
⇒ “2.3 Replacing light bulbs and gas discharge lamps”,
page 161
⇒ “2.4 Replace attachment brackets”, page 165
⇒ “2.5 Removing and installing headlight range control motor”,
page 166
⇒ “2.6 Removing and installing the power output module for head‐
light”, page 168
⇒ “2.7 Removing and installing LED module”, page 168
⇒ “2.8 Change headlight for right-hand and/or left-hand traffic”,
page 169
⇒ “2.9 Setting the headlight beam”, page 170

2.1 Summary of components, headlights

with Xenon discharge lamps
⇒ “2.1.1 Assembly overview, headlights with xenon discharge
lamps up to CW 21/2017”, page 158
⇒ “2.1.2 Assembly overview, headlights with xenon discharge
lamps from CW 22/2017”, page 160

2.1.1 Assembly overview, headlights with xenon discharge lamps up to CW

21/2017

158 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

1 - Light bulb for the parking

light
❑ W5W BV (blue glass)
❑ Replace
⇒ “2.3.3 Replacing the
light bulb for the parking
light W5W BV (blue
glass)”, page 163
2 - Rubber cap
3 - Light bulb for daylight driv‐
ing light and main beam
❑ H15
❑ Replace
⇒ “2.3.2 Replacing H15
bulb for daylight driving
light and main beam”,
page 162
4 - Cover
5 - Headlight range control mo‐
tor
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “2.5.1 Removing and
installing the control mo‐
tor for headlamp range
control, up to CW
22/2017”, page 166
6 - Gas discharge lamp with in‐
tegrated ignition coil
❑ D5S
❑ Replace
⇒ “2.3.1 Replacing the
D5S gas discharge
lamp”, page 161
7 - Cover
8 - Headlight housing
❑ Adjust ⇒ “1.12 Setting the headlight beam”, page 157
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “1.2 Removing and installing headlight”, page 144
❑ Replace attachment brackets ⇒ “2.4 Replace attachment brackets”, page 165
❑ Change headlights for right-hand and/or left-hand traffic
⇒ “2.8 Change headlight for right-hand and/or left-hand traffic”, page 169
9 - Light bulb for the turn signal light
❑ PY21W
❑ Replace ⇒ “2.3.4 Replacing PY21W bulb for turn signal light”, page 164
10 - Clamping device

2. Headlights with Xenon discharge lamps 159

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

2.1.2 Assembly overview, headlights with xenon discharge lamps from CW

22/2017

1 - Screws
❑ 3.5 Nm
2 - Hollow screw
❑ Adjusting element for
exact position adjust‐
ment of the headlight in
the body
3 - Cover for adjustment ele‐
ment
❑ no spare part
4 - Screw
❑ 1.5 Nm
5 - Setting element
❑ no spare part
6 - Headlight housing
❑ Adjust
⇒ “1.12 Setting the
headlight beam”,
page 157
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “1.2 Removing and in‐
stalling headlight”,
page 144
❑ Replace attachment
brackets
⇒ “2.4 Replace attach‐
ment brackets”,
page 165
❑ Change headlights for
right-hand and/or left-
hand traffic
⇒ “2.8 Change headlight
for right-hand and/or
left-hand traffic”,
page 169
7 - LED module
❑ Controls the daytime running light, parking light and flashlight function
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “2.7 Removing and installing LED module”, page 168
8 - Screws
❑ 1.5 Nm
9 - Gas discharge lamp with integrated ignition coil
❑ D5S
❑ Replace ⇒ “2.3.1 Replacing the D5S gas discharge lamp”, page 161
10 - Screws
❑ 1.5 Nm
11 - Holder for actuator
12 - Headlight range control motor
❑ Removing and installing Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
⇒ “2.5.2 Removing and installing the control motor for headlamp range control - as of CW 22/2017”, page
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
166

160 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

13 - Screws
❑ 1.5 Nm
14 - Plastic cap
15 - Screws
❑ 1.5 Nm
16 - Power module for headlights
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “2.6 Removing and installing the power output module for headlight”, page 168

2.2 Removing and installing headlight

Assembly work is similar to that for halogen headlights
⇒ “1.2 Removing and installing headlight”, page 144 .

2.3 Replacing light bulbs and gas discharge

lamps
⇒ “2.3.1 Replacing the D5S gas discharge lamp”, page 161
⇒ “2.3.2 Replacing H15 bulb for daylight driving light and main
beam”, page 162
⇒ “2.3.3 Replacing the light bulb for the parking light W5W BV
(blue glass)”, page 163
⇒ “2.3.4 Replacing PY21W bulb for turn signal light”, page 164

2.3.1 Replacing the “D5S” gas discharge

lamp

WARNING

Observe use and safety instructions for gas discharge lamps

⇒ Electrical System – general notes; Rep. gr. 94 . If a note
Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
cannot be accessed, open thewithWorkshop
respect to theManual
correctness “Electrical
of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
System - General Notes” manually in “ELSA”, Section “94”.
The D5S discharge lamp is pressurised and can explode when
changing the bulb - risk of injury! Wear gloves and safety spec‐
tacles when changing the lamps.

Note

Removing
– Remove headlight
⇒ “1.2 Removing and installing headlight”, page 144 .
– Unscrew the screws -arrows- and remove the cover -1-.

2. Headlights with Xenon discharge lamps 161

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

Variant 1:

Variant 2:
– Release connector and remove it.

– Turn locking straps -1- in direction of arrow -A-.

– Carefully remove the gas discharge lamp -2- in direction of
arrow -B-.
Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
Installing
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the

following points:
– After the installation adjust the headlight.

Note

Use a headlight beam setting device for setting the headlight

beam. The nominal values and the adjustment procedure can be
found in the Manual ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet Rapid .

Tightening torques
Fixing screws for gas discharge lamp 1.5 Nm
cover

2.3.2 Replacing “H15” bulb for daylight driving

light and main beam

WARNING

These H15 bulbs are pressurised and can explode when

changing the bulb - risk of injury! Wear gloves and safety spec‐
tacles when changing the lamps.

162 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

Note

Removing
– Left side - remove the battery to get better access to the bulb
⇒ “1.6 Removing and installing battery”, page 13 .
– Remove rubber cap for headlight -2-.

– Turn the bulb -1- to the left -arrow- and remove from the head‐
light housing.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

2.3.3 Replacing the light bulb for the parking

light “W5W BV” (blue glass)

Note

♦ Do not touch the glass bulb with bare hands when changing
the bulb, use clean fabric gloves. The remaining finger print
would evaporate through the heat of the switched on bulb and
condense on the reflector, which impairs the luminosity of the
headlight.
♦ When installing the rubber cap, pay attention to the correct
fitting. Water ingress destroys the headlight.
♦ Switch
Protectedoff the ignition
by copyright. Copyingand all electrical
for private or commercial components
purposes, in part orbefore
in whole, is not permitted
changing thebybulb.
unless authorised ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

2. Headlights with Xenon discharge lamps 163

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

Removing
– Remove rubber cap -1-.

– Slacken the bulb holder -1- by pendular movement and pulling

force -arrow-.
– Remove the bulb from the socket.
Installing
– After replacing the bulb, press socket fully into the headlight.
– Position rubber cap.
Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

2.3.4 Replacing “PY21W” bulb for turn signal

light

Note

Removing
– Turn the socket -4- towards the left and remove.
– Replace defective light bulb.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

164 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

2.4 Replace attachment brackets

If the outer headlight fixing brackets are broken or damaged, they
can be replaced by installing the repair kit. The complete head‐
light must not be replaced.

Note

♦ Before repairs check if the headlight has no other damage, as

the repair would be senseless.
♦ The replacement brackets can be ordered separately see ⇒
Electronic Catalogue of Original Parts “ETKA” .
♦ Before repairs the headlight must be removed.
♦ After installing the headlight, adjust the headlight
⇒ “1.12 Setting the headlight beam”, page 157 .

Screw adjusting nut into the new bracket:

Before attaching to the headlight housing, the adjusting screw
-2- must be screwed into the new bracket -1-.
The adjusting screw is designed to Protected
tap thebythread
copyright.in the new
Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
bracket. unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
The adjusting screw must be screwed into the bracket exactly
straight, otherwise there is a risk that the new bracket will break.
To screw the adjusting screw -2- into the new bracket -1- accu‐
rately, use e.g. the vice jaws. (Use e.g. the hex socket -4- from
the tool set for support on one side. On the other side, use e.g. a
piece of pipe, a washer, or screw etc. Pos. -3-.
Slowly screw the adjusting screw into the new bracket, which
slowly tightening the vice jaws (a second mechanic is required for
this step).
Replace the original bracket with a new bracket:
– Remove the remains of the original crate.
– Change the contact surface (grind off, remove by file) to allow
a new bracket to be inserted properly.

– Install a new bracket -arrows- with adjusting screw already

tightened flush to the profile and tighten the fixing screws.
Tightening torques
Fixing screws for bracket 1.5 Nm

2. Headlights with Xenon discharge lamps 165

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

2.5 Removing and installing headlight range

control motor
⇒ “2.5.1 Removing and installing the control motor for headlamp
range control, up to CW 22/2017”, page 166
⇒ “2.5.2 Removing and installing the control motor for headlamp
range control - as of CW 22/2017”, page 166

2.5.1 Removing and installing the control mo‐

tor for headlamp range control, up to CW
22/2017
Removing
– Remove headlight with defective control motor
⇒ “1.2 Removing and installing headlight”, page 144 .
– Turn the cover to the left -3- and remove, also remove the
cover -2- for purposes of presentation.

– Detach the control motor -1- by turning it to the left in direction

Note

When installing the caps, pay attention to the correct fitting. Water
ingress destroys the headlight.

– Inspect proper operation.

– Adjust headlight ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet Rapid .

2.5.2 Removing and installing the control mo‐

tor for headlamp range control - as of
CW 22/2017
Removing
– Remove headlight with defective control motor
⇒ “1.2 Removing and installing headlight”, page 144 .

166 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Unscrew screws -arrows- and remove cover -1-.

– To get better access, remove the gas discharge lamp
⇒ “2.3.1 Replacing the D5S gas discharge lamp”, page 161 .

– Remove the screw -arrow-, cover -3- and the adjusting ele‐
ment -2-.

– Remove screws-arrows- and push the actuator pressure bolt

out of the mounting.
– Remove the actuator -1- with holder -2- from the headlight.
– Release connector and remove it.

2. Headlights with Xenon discharge lamps 167

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

Note

When installing the cover, pay attention to the correct fitting. Wa‐
ter ingress destroys the headlight.

– Inspect proper operation.

– Adjust headlight ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet Rapid .

2.6 Removing and installing the power out‐

put module for headlight
Removing
– Remove headlight
⇒ “1.2 Removing and installing headlight”, page 144 .
– Unscrew the screws -arrows- and remove the control unit -1-.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:

Note

♦ Correctly install the seal when installing the control unit. Water
ingress destroys the headlight.
♦ Check headlights and adjust if necessary ⇒ Maintenance ;
Booklet Rapid .

Tightening torques
♦ ⇒ “2.1.2 Assembly overview, headlights with xenon discharge
lamps from CW 22/2017”, page 160

2.7 Removing and installing LED module

Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ ESD workstation - VAS 6613-

Caution

Work on the LED module exclusively at an ESD workstation.

168 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

ESD workstation - VAS 6613- structure

1- Plug adapter for earthing module
2- Earthing module
3- ESD table mat
4- Wrist tape
Removing
– Remove headlight
⇒ “1.2 Removing and installing headlight”, page 144 .

– Unscrew the screws -arrows- and remove the LED module

-1-.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:

Note

Correctly install the seal when installing the control unit. Water
ingress destroys the headlight.

Tightening torques
♦ ⇒ “2.1.2 Assembly overview, headlights with xenon discharge
lamps from CW 22/2017”, page
Protected 160 Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
by copyright.
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
2.8 Change headlight for right-hand and/or
left-hand traffic
⇒ “2.8.1 Change headlight for right-hand and/or left-hand drive for
vehicles manufactured up to CW 212017”, page 169
⇒ “2.8.2 Change headlights for right-hand or left-hand drive, ve‐
hicles manufactured from CW 22.2017 (facelift)”, page 170

2.8.1 Change headlight for right-hand and/or

left-hand drive for vehicles manufac‐
tured up to CW 212017
The headlight inner aperture should be switched over when driv‐
ing in countries which drive on the right or the left thereby pre‐
venting blinding of the drivers travelling in the opposite direction.
The change is identical for both headlights.
Work procedure
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Unplug the connector from the headlight.

2. Headlights with Xenon discharge lamps 169

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Unscrew screws -arrows- and remove the gas discharge lamp

cover -1-.

Note

To make access to the screws for the gas discharge lamp cover
easier, you can also remove the cap in the wheelhouse liner.

– Push the lever -1- downwards -arrow-.

The headlight on the left:

The headlight on the right:

– Reinstall cover for gas discharge lamp.

Note

When installing the caps, pay attention to the correct fitting. Water
ingress destroys the headlight.

Tightening torques
Fixing screws for gas discharge lamp 1.5 Nm
cover Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

2.8.2 Change headlights for right-hand or left-

hand drive, vehicles manufactured from
CW 22.2017 (facelift)
Luminous flux of a headlight is not adjusted when travelling in
countries where you drive on the other side.

2.9 Setting the headlight beam

Note

Use a headlight beam setting device for setting the headlight

beam. The nominal values and the adjustment procedure can be
found in the Manual ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet Rapid .

170 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

3 FULL-LED headlight
⇒ “3.1 Summary of components - FULL-LED headlights”,
page 171
⇒ “3.2 Removing and installing the power output module for head‐
light”, page 173
⇒ “3.3 Removing and installing LED module for daytime running,
parking and turn signal light”, page 173
⇒ “3.4 Installing repair kit for headlight housing”, page 174
⇒ “3.5 Removing and installing the control motor for headlamp
range control V48 / V49 ”, page 175
⇒ “3.6 Setting the headlight beam”, page 176
⇒ “3.7 Change headlight for right-hand and/or left-hand traffic”,
page 176

3.1 Summary of components - FULL-LED headlights

Detailed summary of components and functional description of
the headlights:
♦ ⇒ Operating instructions Rapid
♦ ⇒ Electronic Catalogue of Original Parts “ETKA”

Note

The headlight wiring loom spare part is only used as a source for spare parts (e.g. connector, fitting etc.). It
therefore cannot be replaced completely in the headlight.

3. FULL-LED headlight 171

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

1 - Screw
❑ 1.5 Nm
2 - Cover for adjustment ele‐
ment
3 - Setting element
❑ no spare part
4 - Screw
❑ 3 pieces
❑ 3.5 ± 0.5 Nm
5 - Hollow screw
❑ Adjusting element for
exact position adjust‐
ment of the headlight in
the body
6 - Screw
❑ 3 pieces
❑ 1.5 Nm
7 - Power output module 1 for
left LED headlight - A31-
❑ or power output module
1 for right LED headlight
- A27-
❑ to control the LED dip‐
ped beam, full beam
and daytime running
light functions
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “3.2 Removing and in‐
stalling the power output
module for headlight”,
page 173
8 - LED module
❑ for cornering light function
❑ Fixing screws 2 Nm
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “1.10.2 Removing and installing LED module, vehicles produced from CW 51.2019”, page 155
9 - Holder for LED module
❑ LED module daytime running light
10 - Screw
❑ 3 pieces
❑ 1.5 Nm
11 - Headlight range control motor
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “3.5 Removing and installing the control motor for headlamp range control V48 / V49 ”, page 175
12 - Cover for servomotor
13 - LED module
❑ for daytime running light, turn signal and side light function
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “3.3 Removing and installing LED module for daytime running, parking and turn signal light”,
page 173
14 - Screw
Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
❑ 2 pieces unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

172 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019
❑ 1.5 Nm
15 - Headlight housing
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “1.2 Removing and installing headlight”, page 144
❑ Adjust ⇒ “3.6 Setting the headlight beam”, page 176
❑ Replace attachment brackets ⇒ “3.4 Installing repair kit for headlight housing”, page 174

3.2 Removing and installing the power out‐

put module for headlight
Applies to FULL-LED headlights.

Note

Power output module 1 - A31- left or power output module 1 - A27-

right.

Removing
– Remove headlight
⇒ “1.2 Removing and installing headlight”, page 144 .
– Unscrew the screws -arrows- and remove the module -1-.
– Release connector and remove it.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:

Caution

Correctly install the seal when installing the module. Water in‐
gress destroys the headlight.

Note

If the LED module is replaced, connect the ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic

tester and, in the “Targeted fault finding” operating mode, select
the “Program configuration” function of the relevant LED module.
Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
Tightening torques unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
♦ ⇒ “3.1 Summary of components - FULL-LED headlights”, page
171

3.3 Removing and installing LED module for

daytime running, parking and turn signal
light
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ ESD workstation - VAS 6613-

Caution

Work on the LED module exclusively at an ESD workstation.

3. FULL-LED headlight 173

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

ESD workstation - VAS 6613- structure

1- Plug adapter for earthing module
2- Earthing module
3- ESD table mat
4- Wrist tape
Removing
– Remove headlight
⇒ “1.2 Removing and installing headlight”, page 144 .

– Remove screws -arrows- and remove the LED module -1-.

Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:

Note

Correctly install the seal when installing the module. Water in‐
gress destroys the headlight.

Tightening torques
♦ ⇒ “3.1 Summary of components - FULL-LED headlights”, page
171

3.4 Installing repair kit for headlight housing

Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
Iftheunless
headlight
authorisedfixing brackets
by ŠKODA AUTO A. are broken
S. ŠKODA AUTOor damaged,
A. S. theyorcan
does not guarantee accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
be replaced by installing the repair kit. The complete headlight
must not be replaced.

Note

♦ Before repairs check if the headlight has no other damage, as

the repair would be senseless.
♦ The replacement brackets can be ordered separately see ⇒
Electronic Catalogue of Original Parts “ETKA” .
♦ Before repairs the headlight must be removed
⇒ “1.2 Removing and installing headlight”, page 144 .
♦ After installing the headlight, adjust the headlight
⇒ “1.12 Setting the headlight beam”, page 157 .

– Remove the remains of the original crate.

– Change the contact surface (grind off, remove by file) to allow
a new bracket to be inserted properly.

174 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Install a new bracket -arrows- with adjusting screw already

screwed in flush to the profile.
– Screw on the new bracket with self-tapping screws.
Tightening torques
Component Tightening torque
Fixing screws for new bracket 1.5 Nm

3.5 Removing and installing the control mo‐

tor for headlamp range control -V48- / -
V49-
Removing
– Remove headlight with defective control motor
⇒ “1.2 Removing and installing headlight”, page 144 .
– Remove cover -1-.

– Remove -1- screw and cover with gears -2-.

– Remove the segment -3- from the headlight.

3. FULL-LED headlight 175

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Rotate plug -2- and remove actuator -arrow-.

– Then, swivel the actuator -1- in -the direction of the arrow A-

and remove in the direction of the arrow -B-.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:

Caution

When installing the cover, pay attention to the correct fitting.

Water ingress destroys the headlight.

– Inspect proper operation.

– Adjust headlight ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet Rapid .
Tightening torques
♦ ⇒ “3.1 Summary of components - FULL-LED headlights”, page
171

3.6 Setting the headlight beam

Note

Use a headlight beam setting device for setting the headlight

beam. The nominal values and the adjustment procedure can be
found in the Manual ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet Rapid .

3.7 Change headlight for right-hand and/or

left-hand traffic
Adjusting the luminous flux of a FULL-LED headlight when driving
in countries where vehicles drive on the left-hand side is done by
making a change to the software setting in the vehicle.
The travel mode (outward journey) can be set by infotainment,
see ⇒ Rapid Owner's Manual .

176 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

4 Automatic headlight range control

⇒ “4.1 Vehicle level sensor”, page 177
⇒ “4.2 Removing and installing the headlamp range control unit”,
page 177

4.1 Vehicle level sensor

Vehicle level encoder is located on the rear axle and is part of the
headlamp levelling system for the FULL-LED headlight.
Installing and removing senders ⇒ Chassis, axles, steering; Rep.
gr. 43 ; Vehicle level sender .

4.2 Removing and installing the headlamp

range control unit

Note

If the control unit is replaced, connect the ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic

tester and, in the “Targeted fault finding” operating mode, select
the “Configure software” function from the functions of the rele‐
vant control unit.

Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Remove storage compartment on passenger side ⇒ Body
Work; Rep. gr. 70 .
– Press locking lugs one after the other, release arrows -A- and
control unit -2- from the holder -1- in the direction of the arrow
-B-.

4. Automatic headlight range control 177

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– If necessary, press out the bolts and then unhook the locking
lugs -1- and the holder -2- -arrow-and remove.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

178 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

5 Side turn signal in the wing

⇒ “5.1 Removing and installing side turn signal in the wing”, page
179

5.1 Removing and installing side turn signal

in the wing
Removing

Note

The catch peg -arrow- is positioned at the front right or front left
of the vehicle.

– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!

– Unscrew 4 screws -4- from wheelhouse liner.
– Press the turn signal light with the hand from inside.
– Pull the housing -1- out of its socket -3-.
– Light bulb -2- can now also be pulled out for replacing.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

Note

The housing of the turn signal light -1- must lock in place in the
wing.

Tightening torques
Fixing screw for wheelhouse liner 1 Nm

5. Side turn signal in the wing 179

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

6 Lights in the exterior mirror

⇒ “6.1 Removing and installing the turn signal light in the exterior
mirror”, page 180
⇒ “6.2 Removing and installing signal bulb in exterior mirror L131 /
L132 ”, page 180

6.1 Removing and installing the turn signal

light in the exterior mirror
Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Remove mirror glass ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 66 .
– Push off catches -arrows-, tilt out the cover -1- a little and re‐
move by moving it upwards.

– Remove socket with bulb -1- -arrow-.

– Unscrew screw -1-, tilt out the turn signal light -2- a little
-arrow- and remove.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– Performing functional tests of all functions.

6.2 Removing and installing signal bulb in

exterior mirror -L131- / -L132-
♦ Bulb WY5W

180 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Remove mirror glass ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 66 .
– Push off catches -arrows-, tilt out the cover -1- a little and re‐
move by moving it upwards.

– Remove socket with bulb -1- -arrow-.

– Push off defective light bulb WY5W from the socket and re‐
place.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– Performing functional tests of all functions.

6. Lights in the exterior mirror 181

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

7 Tail lights
⇒ “7.1 Tail lights, vehicles manufactured up to CW 50.2019”, page
182
⇒ “7.2 Tail lights, vehicles manufactured from CW 51.2019”, page
184

7.1 Tail lights, vehicles manufactured up to

CW 50.2019
⇒ “7.1.1 Removing and installing tail light”, page 182
⇒ “7.1.2 Replacing the light bulbs of the tail light”, page 183

7.1.1 Removing and installing tail light

Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Insert the assembly tool - T10389- or a hook for wheel trim
caps into the opening of the cover -1-, unclip the cover
-arrow- from the catches -2- in sequence and remove.

– Unscrew screws -3-.

– Take hold of the light -1- and release it carefully from the as‐
sembly opening in the installed axle by moving it laterally
-arrow-.
– Unlock and pull off connector -2-.
Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
Installing unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:

Note

Pay attention to the correct fitting and undamaged seals.

Caution

When inserting the lights into the assembly opening, ensure

that the connection wiring loom is inserted into the vehicle
cockpit.
Crushed cables between the body and lights causes significant
leakage of rainwater and light malfunctions.

Tightening torques
Fixing screws for tail light 2.5 Nm

182 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

7.1.2 Replacing the light bulbs of the tail light

– Remove tail light
⇒ “7.1.1 Removing and installing tail light”, page 182 .
– Slacken and remove the lamp holder from the retaining tabs
-arrows- (not valid when replacing the bulb for the parking light
-Pos. 2-, when removing the bulb holder, turn it to the left and
take it out).
Rapid:

Rapid Spaceback:

– Replace defective light bulb.

1- Brake and parking light - twin filament light bulb P21/4W
2- Parking light - light bulb W3W
3- Turn signal light - light bulb PY21W
4- Fog and parking light - twin filament light bulb P21/4W (fog
light only lights up on driver's side)
5- Reversing light - light bulb P21W

7. Tail lights 183

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

7.2 Tail lights, vehicles manufactured from

CW 51.2019
⇒ “7.2.1 Installation overview - tail lamps”, page 184
⇒ “7.2.2 Removing and installing tail light”, page 184
⇒ “7.2.3 Removing and installing the tail light in the tailgate”, page
185
⇒ “7.2.4 Removing and installing the light bulb for the turn signal
light”, page 186

7.2.1 Installation overview - tail lamps

Note

LEDs cannot be replaced separately.

1 - Light bulb for the turn signal

light
❑ WY16W
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “7.2.4 Removing and
installing the light bulb
for the turn signal light”,
page 186
2 - Tail light
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “7.2.2 Removing and
installing tail light”, page
184
3 - Screw
❑ 2.5 Nm
Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
4 -unless
Side cover
authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

5 - Nut
❑ 3 Nm
6 - Light bulb for reversing light
❑ not for this model
7 - Screws
❑ 3 Nm
8 - Tail light in tailgate
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “7.2.3 Removing and
installing the tail light in
the tailgate”, page 185
9 - Guide section

7.2.2 Removing and installing tail light

Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Release tool - T10389-

184 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Insert the unlocking tool - T10389- or a hook into the opening
of the cover -1- in order to remove the wheel trim caps (tool
kit), unclip the cover -arrow- from the catches in sequence and
remove.

– Unscrew screws -2-.

– Take hold
unless of the light
authorised -1- and
by ŠKODA AUTOrelease
A. S. ŠKODA it carefully from
AUTO A. S. does the
Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
not guarantee or accept any liability
mounts in
withthe installed
respect axle -arrow-
to the correctness byinmoving
of information it laterally.
this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

– Disconnect plug.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:

Note

Pay attention to the correct fitting and undamaged seals.

Caution

Hazard caused by water ingress and functional faults of the

light!
When inserting the lights into the assembly opening, ensure
that the connection wiring loom is inserted into the vehicle
cockpit.
Crushed cables between the body and lights causes significant
leakage of rainwater and light malfunctions.

Tightening torques
♦ ⇒ “7.2.1 Installation overview - tail lamps”, page 184

7.2.3 Removing and installing the tail light in

the tailgate
Removing
– Remove the tailgate trim panel.

7. Tail lights 185

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Unscrew the nuts -3-.

– Remove plug -1- and remove from the headlamps -2-.

– Swivel out light -1- swing out -arrow- and remove from the as‐
sembly opening while taking the connected cable lengths into
account.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
Tightening torques
♦ ⇒ “7.2.1 Installation overview - tail lamps”, page 184

7.2.4 Removing and installing the light bulb for

the turn signal light

Note

Do not touch the glass when installing the light bulb. Your fingers
will leave traces of grease on the glass which then evaporate
when the bulb is switched on causing it to cloud.

Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Remove tail light
⇒ “7.2.2 Removing and installing tail light”, page 184 .
– Turn mount with light bulb -1- in -the direction of the arrow A-
and remove in the direction of the arrow -B-.
– Replace defective light bulb WY16W.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
Tightening torques Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
♦ ⇒ “7.2.1 Installation overview - tailtolamps”,
with respect page
the correctness 184 in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
of information

186 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

8 Registration number lighting

⇒ “8.1 Removing and installing licence plate carrier”, page 187
⇒ “8.2 Replacing bulb for the number plate light”, page 187

8.1 Removing and installing licence plate

carrier
Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Use a suitable screwdriver -arrow- to lever the light -1- out of
the tailgate.

Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
– Disconnect the plug -1- from the light -2-.
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– The plug -1- is located on the right vehicle side.
– Perform a functional test.

8.2 Replacing bulb for the number plate light

Note

♦ LEDs are used for lighting in the Top scope of equipment.

♦ LEDs cannot be replaced separately.

– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!

– Remove number plate light
⇒ “8.1 Removing and installing licence plate carrier”,
page 187 .

8. Registration number lighting 187

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Replace the defective light bulb -1- (W5W).

– After installing, perform a functional test.

188 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

9 Additional brake light

⇒ “9.1 Removing and installing high level brake light”, page 189

9.1 Removing and installing high level brake

light
⇒ “9.1.1 Removing and installing the high level brake light - Rap‐
id”, page 189
⇒ “9.1.2 Removing and installing the high level brake light - Rapid
Spaceback”, page 189

9.1.1 Removing and installing the high level

brake light - Rapid
Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Consecutively press the retaining tabs in direction of arrow
-A- and detach the cover -2- from the light housing -1- in di‐
rection of arrow -B-.

Note

The light strip is fitted with LEDs, which cannot be replaced indi‐
vidually. In the event of a fault, the brake light must be replaced
completely.

9.1.2 Removing and installing the high level

brake light - Rapid Spaceback

Caution

When using the lever tool, mask points where the lever tool is
applied using commercially available adhesive tape.

Special tools and workshop equipment required

♦ Disassembly wedge - T10383- , if necessary, plastic spatula

9. Additional brake light 189

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Attach a strip of commercially available adhesive tape -1- to
the area of the rear lid above the bulb for the additional brake
light.

– Insert the assembly wedge - T10383- (vehicles with glued

spoiler, use plastic spatula) -1- in stages from the top right
corner between bulb for additional brake light - M25- -2- and
rear lid.

– Release the catches of the bulb for additional brake light -

M25- successively by pushing the assembly wedge in direc‐
tion of travel. Work from right to left.
– Pull light out of tailgate, taking connected wire lengths into ac‐
count.

190 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Unlock and disconnect hose connection -1-.

– Unlock and disconnect plug connection -2- and remove light.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:

Note

When installing the additional brake light bulb - M25- , ensure the
seal is seated correctly. Make sure that the seal is undamaged
and that no loops are formed.

– Mount plug.
– Connect hose connection for spray jet. Ensure correct locking
by pulling slightly on the connection.
– Press lamp for high level brake light, starting from the bottom
edge, into the assembly opening until it audibly locks into
place.
– Check the function of the lamp for high level brake light - M25-
and of the rear window spray nozzle.

9. Additional brake light 191

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

10 Fog lights, fog lights with “Corner”

function and daylight driving light
⇒ “10.1 Removing and installing the fog lights, vehicles manu‐
factured until CW 50.2019”, page 192
⇒ “10.2 Removing and installing fog lights, vehicles manufactured
from CW 51.2019.”, page 193
⇒ “10.3 Adjusting the fog light”, page 193
⇒ “10.4 Replacing light bulb for fog light”, page 194

10.1 Removing and installing the fog lights,

vehicles manufactured until CW
50.2019
Removing
Vehicles without ScoutLine package:
– For example, insert an assembly tool - T10389- or a hook for
the wheel trim caps (tool kit) into the opening in the grid
-top arrow- and unclip the grids -1- from the catches in se‐
quence and remove. Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

Vehicles fitted with ScoutLine package:

– Unscrew screws -2-.

– E.g. hook a puller -2- from the tool kit or an assembly tool -
T10389- into the opening, arrow -C- in the cover -1-.
– Loosen and remove the cover -1- by pulling on the assembly
tool in direction of arrow -A- and -B-.
All vehicles:

192 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Release screws -arrows-.

– Remove the fog light.
– Disconnect plug.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
Tightening torques
Fixing screws for fog light cover 1 Nm
Fixing screws for fog lights 1.5 Nm

10.2 Removing and installing fog lights, vehi‐

cles manufactured from CW 51.2019.
Removing
– For example, insert an assembly tool - T10389- or a pull-off
hook for the wheel trim caps (vehicle kit) into the opening in
the grille -arrow- and unclip the grille -1- from the latches one
after the other and remove in the direction of arrow -B-.

– Release screws -arrows-.

– Take out the fog lights -1-.
– Disconnect plug.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following
Protected points:
by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
Tightening torques
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

Fixing screws for fog lights 1.5 Nm

10.3 Adjusting the fog light

Note

Use a headlight beam setting device for setting the headlight

beam. The nominal values and the adjustment procedure can be
found in the Manual ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet Rapid .

10. Fog lights, fog lights with “Corner” function and daylight driving light 193
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

10.4 Replacing light bulb for fog light

WARNING

These H8 bulbs are pressurised and can explode when chang‐

ing the bulb - risk of injury! Wear gloves and safety spectacles
when changing the lamps.

Note

Do not touch the glass when installing the light bulb. Your fingers
will leave traces of grease on the glass which then evaporate
when the bulb is switched on causing it to cloud.

– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!

– Remove fog light
⇒ “10.1 Removing and installing the fog lights, vehicles man‐
ufactured until CW 50.2019”, page 192 .
– Turn socket with lamp in -direction of arrow- and remove.
– Replace defective light bulb.
– Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

194 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

11 Entry and start authorisation

⇒ “11.1 Installation overview - entry and start authorisation”, page
195
⇒ “11.2 Install and remove interior aerial 1 for entry and start
system R138 ”, page 196
⇒ “11.3 Install and remove aerial in luggage compartment for
entry and start system R137 ”, page 197
⇒ “11.4 Install and remove aerial in rear bumper for entry and
start system R136 ”, page 197
⇒ “11.5 Control unit for keyless entry authorisation”, page 198
⇒ “11.6 Connection assignment of the connector on the control
unit for keyless entry authorisation”, page 199

11.1 Installation overview - entry and start authorisation

There are two equipment variants of entry and start authorisation
(KESSY):
♦ GO KESSY
♦ FULL KESSY

11. Entry and start authorisation 195

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

1 - Antenna
❑ under the rear bumper
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “11.4 Install and re‐
move aerial in rear
bumper for entry and
start system R136 ”,
page 197
2 - Antenna
❑ Aerial in the middle of
the luggage compart‐
ment
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “11.3 Install and re‐
move aerial in luggage
compartment for entry
and start system R137 ”,
page 197
3 - Aerial and sensors
❑ in the outer door handle
on the driver's side
❑ Basic equipment Start
❑ in the case of a fault, re‐
place the complete door
handle ⇒ Body Work;
Rep. gr. 58
4 - Button for starting system -
E408-
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “2.9 Removing and in‐
stalling starter button
E408 ”, page 235
5 - Immobiliser reader coil - D2-
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “2.9 Removing and in‐
stalling starter button E408 ”, page 235
6 - Steering lock with control unit for electronic steering column lock - J764- (ESCL)
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “12.5.2 Removing and installing the electronic steering lock”, page 208
7 - Interface for entry and start system - J965-
❑ next to the glove compartment on front passenger side
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “11.5 Control unit for keyless entry authorisation”, page 198
8 - Antenna
❑ under the centre console in the centre
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “11.2 Install and remove interior aerial 1 for entry and start system R138 ”, page 196
9 - Aerial and sensors
❑ in the outer door handle on the front passenger side
❑ in the case of a fault, replace the complete outer door handle ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 58

11.2 Install and remove unless

interior aerial 1 for
Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
entry and start system - R138-
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

The aerial is glued in place on both sides under the handbrake

with adhesive tape underneath the floor covering.

196 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Remove the centre console ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 68 .
– Loosen the antenna -1- with a lever (e.g. -T10236- ) or by hand
and disconnect the plug.
Installing
– Connect the plug and glue the antenna back to its original in‐
stallation location with double-sided adhesive tape -2-, see
Fig.
Further installation occurs in reverse order.

11.3 Install and remove aerial in luggage

compartment for entry and start system
- R137-
The aerial Is located behind the rear seats underneath the floor
covering in the middle.
Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Fold down the rear seats and raise the floor covering in the
luggage compartment.
– Remove the connector -1- and carefully pull off the aerial -2-
from the bearing in the bodyshell, e.g. with the removal tool for
the lining of the door panel -T10236- .
Installing
– Fit connector and press the straddling dowels for aerial into
the assembly openings.

11.4 Install and remove aerial in rear bumper

for entry and start system - R136-
The aerial can be found on the bodyshell, in the middle under the
rear bumper.
Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Remove rear bumper ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 63 .

11. Entry and start authorisation 197

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Press off catch pegs -arrows-, tilt aerial -1- up and push it out.
– Disconnect plug.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

11.5 Control unit for keyless entry authorisa‐

tion
The control unit is located in the storage compartment in the dash
panel on the front passenger side.
Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Remove the lateral dash panel cover -1- on the front passen‐
ger side.
Vehicles manufactured up to CW 50.2019:
– Remove the side vent from the dash panel on the passenger's
side ⇒ Heating, Air Conditioning; Rep. gr. 80 .
Vehicles manufactured as of CW 51.2019 (facelift)
– Remove storage compartment on passenger side ⇒ Body
Work; Rep. gr. 70 .
All vehicles:

– Unclip the control unit -1- with mounting bracket -2- -arrows-
and, taking into account the connected lines.

Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
– Disconnect plug connection
unless authorised-3- by unlocking
by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.andŠKODAtilting
AUTOoutA. S.the
does not guarantee or accept any liability
clamp. with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

– Swivel out the control unit -1- and remove from the mounting
bracket -2- -arrows-.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– If the control unit has been replaced, code using ⇒ Vehicle
diagnostic tester. The ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester must be
connected and online.
– Test the complete system for proper operation.

198 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

11.6 Connection assignment of the connec‐

tor on the control unit for keyless entry
authorisation
The connection assignment for the multi-pin connector can be
found in ⇒ Current flow diagrams, Electrical fault finding and Fit‐
ting locations.

11. Entry and start authorisation 199

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

12 Switch unit on the steering column

⇒ “12.1 Assembly overview - switch unit on the steering column”,
page 200
⇒ “12.2 Removing and installing steering column combination
switch”, page 203
⇒ “12.3 Removing and installing return ring with slip ring from
steering column combination switch”, page 206
⇒ “12.4 Adjusting centre position for return ring with slip ring”,
page 207
⇒ “12.5 Removing and installing steering lock housing”,
page 208
⇒ “12.6 Removing and installing lock cylinder”, page 208
⇒ “12.7 Removing and installing ignition/starter switch”,
page 209
⇒ “12.8 Contact assignment on the ignition starter switch”,
page 211
⇒ “12.9 Removing and installing ignition key anti-removal lock
solenoid N376 ”, page 211

12.1 Assembly overview - switch unit on the

steering column
⇒ “12.1.1 Switch unit on the steering column with mechanical
steering lock”, page 200
⇒ “12.1.2 Switch unit on the steering column with Control unit for
electronic steering column trim panel J764 ”, page 202

12.1.1 Switch unit unless

on the steering
by ŠKODA AUTOcolumn
A. S. ŠKODA with
AUTOmechanical
A. S. does not guarantee steering lock
Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
authorised or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

200 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

1 - Shear bolt
❑ for steering lock housing
❑ 2 pieces
2 - Magnet for ignition key anti-
removal lock - N376-
❑ only on vehicles with au‐
tomatic gearbox
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “12.9 Removing and
installing ignition key
anti-removal lock sole‐
noid N376 ”, page 211
3 - Ignition key
4 - Lock cylinder
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “12.6 Removing and
installing lock cylinder”,
page 208
❑ with immobilizer reader
coil - D2-
5 - Steering column combina‐
tion unless
switch - E595-
Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
❑ with
Removing and installing
respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

⇒ “12.2 Removing and

installing steering col‐
umn combination
switch”, page 203
6 - Restoring ring with slip ring
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “12.3 Removing and
installing return ring with
slip ring from steering
column combination
switch”, page 206
7 - Screw
❑ 3 pieces
❑ 1.1 Nm
8 - Ignition starter switch - D-
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “12.7 Removing and installing ignition/starter switch”, page 209
9 - Steering lock housing
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “12.5.1 Removing and installing the mechanical steering lock”, page 208
10 - Steering column

12. Switch unit on the steering column 201

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

12.1.2 Switch unit on the steering column with Control unit for electronic steering
column trim panel - J764-

1 - Button for starting system -

E408-
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “2.9 Removing and in‐
stalling starter button
E408 ”, page 235
2 - Ignition key
3 - Immobiliser reader coil - D2-
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “2.9 Removing and in‐
stalling starter button
E408 ”, page 235
4 - Steering column combina‐
tion switch - E595-
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “12.2.2 Removing and
installing steering col‐
umn combination switch
- installed as of CW
22.2015”, page 204
5 - Restoring ring with slip ring
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “12.3 Removing and
installing return ring with
slip ring from steering
column combination
switch”, page 206
6 - Screw
❑ 3 pieces
❑ 1.1 Nm
7 - Steering lock with control
unit for electronic steering col‐
umn lock - J764- (ESCL)
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “12.5.2 Removing and installing the electronic steering lock”, page 208
8 - Steering column
Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
9 - Shear bolt unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
❑ for steering lock housing
❑ 2 pieces

202 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

12.2 Removing and installing steering col‐

umn combination switch
⇒ “12.2.1 Removing and installing steering column combination
switch - installed up to CW 21.2015”, page 203
⇒ “12.2.2 Removing and installing steering column combination
switch - installed as of CW 22.2015”, page 204

12.2.1 Removing and installing steering col‐

umn combination switch - installed up to
CW 21.2015
Removing
– Disconnect battery earth strap
⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10 .
– Remove steering wheel ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 69 .

Note

♦ The steering wheel must be in its central position (wheels in

straight ahead position) before removing the steering column.
♦ There is no positioning pin present on the return ring, which
would lock it against inadvertent twisting after removing the
steering wheel.

– Remove top and bottom steering column trim panel; make

sure that the return ring -2- is not twisted out of position ⇒
Body Work; Rep. gr. 70 .
– Lock return ring with slip ring with transport lock -3- or with
adhesive tape in centre position (connector -1- must be hori‐
zontal at top).

12. Switch unit on the steering column 203

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Unscrew bolt -4-.

– Disconnect plugs -1-, -3- and -5-.
– Slide combination switch -6- with return ring -2- off the steering
column -arrows-.
– If necessary remove return ring -2- with slip ring
⇒ “12.3 Removing and installing return ring with slip ring from
steering column combination switch”, page 206 .
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– When removing, the wheels must be in the straight ahead po‐
sition.
– Return ring with slip ring must be in the centre position.

Note

In case of doubt that the return ring is in the centre position, set
the centre position of the return ring
⇒ “12.4 Adjusting centre position for return ring with slip ring”,
page 207 .

– Slide on the combination switchProtected

until the stop on
by copyright. the for
Copying steering
private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
wheel rod is reached. unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
– Guide the tensioning screw -4- correctly into the assembly
opening.
– Do not forget to remove the adhesive tape or the transport
security from the return ring before installing the steering
wheel.
– Observe correct mounting sequence of steering wheel and
airbag ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 69 .
Tightening torques
Fixing screw for combination switch, Pos. 1 Nm
-4-

12.2.2 Removing and installing steering col‐

umn combination switch - installed as of
CW 22.2015
Removing
– Disconnect battery earth strap
⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10 .
– Remove steering wheel ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 69 .

Note

♦ The steering wheel must be in its central position (wheels in

204 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Remove top and bottom steering column trim panel; make

– Unlock and disconnect connector -2- from return ring -1-.

– Release and disconnect connector -2- from switch -1- on left.

– Release and disconnect connector -2- from switch -1- on right.

12. Switch unit on the steering column 205

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Press off catches -2- in -direction of arrow- and move switch

-1- from the steering column slightly.

– Press off bottom catch -2- in -direction of arrow- and move out
switch -1- from the steering column.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– When removing, the wheels must be in the straight ahead po‐
sition.
– Return ring with slip ring must be in the centre position.

Note Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
In case of doubt that the return ring is in the centre position, set
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

the centre position of the return ring

⇒ “12.4 Adjusting centre position for return ring with slip ring”,
page 207 .

– Slide on the combination switch until the stop on the steering

wheel rod is reached.
– Do not forget to remove the adhesive tape or the transport
security from the return ring before installing the steering
wheel.
– Observe correct mounting sequence of steering wheel and
airbag ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 69 .

12.3 Removing and installing return ring with

slip ring from steering column combina‐
tion switch

Note

♦ Vehicles with ESP and/or with corner light and fog lights with
the “corner light” function (static cornering light) are addition‐
ally fitted with the steering angle sender - G85- , which is
integrated together with the slip ring in one housing. The as‐
sembly work is identical for both types of return rings.
♦ When removing the return ring, the combination switch must
not be removed from the steering column.

Removing
– Disconnect battery earth strap
⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10 .
– Remove steering wheel ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 69 .

206 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

Note

♦ The steering wheel must be in its central position (wheels in

– Remove top and bottom steering column trim panel; make

sure that the return ring -1- is not twisted out of position ⇒
Body Work; Rep. gr. 70 .
– Lock return ring with transport lock -2- or with adhesive tape
in centre position.
– Remove connector -3-.
– Unscrew screws -arrows- and remove return ring -1- from
combination switch.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– Move the lever of the turn signal light in Neutral so that the
release pin does not break off when installing.
– For vehicles with heated steering wheel, when replacing, carry
out the coding and parameterisation using ⇒ Vehicle diagnos‐
tic tester.
Tightening torques
Fixing screws for return ring with slip ring 1 Nm
(-arrows-).

12.4 Adjusting centre position for return ring

with slip ring
It is only carried out if there is a doubt about the correct setting of
the centre position for the return ring rotor.
Work procedure
– Put the front wheels in straight ahead position.
– Slowly turn the ring rotor -2- manually to the left up to the stop.
– Turn the ring rotor -2- by approx. 2.5 turns to the right so that
the connector -1- at the top is in horizontal position (look in the
left inspection hole next to the connector in order to check the
correct adjustment of the slip ring). Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
– Install steering wheel ⇒ Body Work; Rep.with gr.respect
69 ,toifthe
necessary
correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
lock ring rotor with transport security -3- or adhesive tape.

12. Switch unit on the steering column 207

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

12.5 Removing and installing steering lock

housing
⇒ “12.5.1 Removing and installing the mechanical steering lock”,
page 208
⇒ “12.5.2 Removing and installing the electronic steering lock”,
page 208

12.5.1 Removing and installing the mechanical

steering lock
The instructions for removing and installing the mechanical steer‐
ing lock can be found under ⇒ Chassis; Rep. gr. 48 .

12.5.2 Removing and installing the electronic

steering lock
The instructions for removing and installing the electronic steering
lock can be found under ⇒ Chassis; Rep. gr. 48 .

12.6 Removing and installing lock cylinder

Removing

Note

Before the steering wheel is removed from the shaft, the front
wheels must be brought into the straight ahead position.

– Disconnect battery earth strap

⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10 .
– Remove steering wheel ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 69 .
– Removing top and bottom steering column trim ⇒ Body Work;
Rep. gr. 70 .
– Carefully disconnect the plug connection -arrow- of the reader
coil for the vehicle immobiliser on the lock cylinder.

Note

The reader coil for the vehicle immobiliser is fixed to the lock cyl‐
inder and cannot be replaced separately.

Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
– Insert ignition key into
unless authorised lock cylinder
by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.andŠKODAturnAUTOin A.such a not
S. does way that or accept any liability
guarantee
the marking on the reader coil -1- is opposite the hole in the
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

lock cylinder -2-.

– Insert steel cable (about ∅ 1.2 mm) into the hole -2- next to
the key.

208 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Use the steel cable -2- to unlock the securing lever -3- of the
lock cylinder -arrow- and pull the lock cylinder with the inserted
key out of the steering lock housing.

WARNING

Risk of blocking the steering lock!

The steering lock must not be moved without the lock cylinder,
otherwise it would block.

Note

The blocked steering lock must be replaced

Installing
– Insert ignition key into the lock cylinder, turn and insert steel
cable (see removal).
– Insert lock cylinder into the steering lock housing.

Note

♦ Please ensure when inserting the lock cylinder that the con‐
nection for the reader coil of the vehicle immobiliser is lying in
the guideway for the steering lock housing.
♦ If the lock cylinder with the reader coil including the key was
replaced, adapt immobiliser with ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester.

– Fit the connector together on the reading coil for immobiliser.

– Installing top and bottom steering column trim ⇒ Body Work;
Rep. gr. 70 .
– Observe correct mounting sequence of steering wheel and
airbag ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 69 .
– Follow the work procedure when connecting the battery
⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10 .

12.7 Removing and installing ignition/starter

switch
Two small e.g. watch screwdriver ∅ 2 mm must be used for re‐
moval. Tools must be made from welding / steel wire ∅ 2 mm as
follows:

12. Switch unit on the steering column 209

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– At one end of a ∅ 2 mm welded/steel wire, bend a loop and

cut to length -a-.
• Dimension -a- = approx. 65 mm
– File the end of the wire hook from one end until sharp.
• Dimension -b- = 5 mm.
Removing
– Disconnect battery earth strap
⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10 .
– Remove steering wheel ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 69 .
– Removing top and bottom steering column trim ⇒ Body Work;
Rep. gr. 70 .
– Turn the ignition key in the position Ignition “ON”.
– Disconnect plug from ignition starter switch -1-.
– Insert tools / screwdrivers into the holes as follows -arrows-.

Variant 1:

Variant 2:
Both variants:

210 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

Note

♦ The hole on the plug is covered with a sticker that needs to be

removed.
♦ When inserting the tools / screwdrivers -1- (for tool tips, see
fig.), -B- rest lightly on the tools / screwdrivers in the direction
of the arrow -A-.

– After inserting the tools / screwdriver -1- until the stop, the
locking lugs -3- are unlocked.
– Remove the ignition switch in direction of arrow -C- (tools /
screwdrivers must remain plugged in when removing the ig‐
nition starter switch).
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:

Note

♦ When installing, the ignition starter switch and the lock cylinder
must be in the same position, e.g. “Ignition ON”.
♦ Observe correct mounting sequence of steering wheel and
airbag ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 69 .

– Insert ignition starter switch into the steering lock until there is
an audible click.
– Follow the work procedure when connecting the battery
⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10 .

12.8 Contact assignment on the ignition start‐

er switch
1- Terminal 15
2- Terminal 30
3- Terminal 50
4- Terminal P - not assigned
5- Terminal 86s
6- Terminal 75
7- Terminal 30

12.9 Removing and installing ignition key an‐

ti-removal lock solenoid - N376-
Removing
– Disconnect battery earth strap
⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10 .
– Remove steering wheel ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 68 .

12. Switch unit on the steering column 211

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

Note

Before the steering wheel is removed from the shaft, the front
wheels must be brought into the straight ahead position.

– Removing top and bottom steering column trim ⇒ Body Work;

Rep. gr. 68 .

WARNING

Risk of damage to the electronic components caused by elec‐

trostatic charge.
Before removing the connector, the mechanic must discharge
himself by briefly making contact with e.g. the door bolts.

– Remove connector -2-.

– Push off the catch in direction of arrow -A- and remove the
ignition key anti-removal lock solenoid -1- in direction of arrow
-B- from the steering lock housing -3-.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– Perform a functional test.

212 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

13 Parking aid
⇒ “13.1 Assembly overview - parking aid”, page 213
⇒ “13.2 Removing and installing the parking aid control unit J446
”, page 214
⇒ “13.3 Removing and installing the rear parking aid warning
buzzer H15 ”, page 215
⇒ “13.4 Removing and installing the front parking aid warning
buzzer H22 ”, page 215
⇒ “13.5 Removing and installing rear parking aid senders”,
page 216
⇒ “13.6 Removing and installing front parking aid sender”,
page 217
⇒ “13.7 Parking aid sender holder - assignment, fitting location,
gluing procedure, drilling of holes”, page 218
⇒ “13.8 Self-diagnosis of the parking aid”, page 219

13.1 Assembly overview - parking aid

Note

♦ Summary of details for the components ⇒ Electronic Cata‐

logue of Original Parts “ETKA” .
♦ Description of the system and the function see ⇒ Owner's
manual Rapid .

13. Parking aid 213

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

1 - Front parking aid warning

buzzer - H22-
❑ to the side of the relay
carrier
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “13.4 Removing and
installing the front park‐
ing aid warning buzzer
H22 ”, page 215
2 - Button for parking aid
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “2.4 Removing and in‐
stalling switches in cen‐
tre console of the dash
panel”, page 231
3 - Front parking aid sender
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “13.6 Removing and
installing front parking
aid sender”, page 217
4 - Rear parking aid sender
❑ From CW 51.2019, four
sensors in the lower
bumper trim
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “13.5 Removing and
installing rear parking
aid senders”, page 216
5 - Control unit for the parking
aid - J446-
Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
❑ under the left side trim
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
panel in luggage com‐with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
partment
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “13.2 Removing and
installing the parking aid control unit J446 ”, page 214
6 - Rear parking aid warning buzzer - H15-
❑ under the top trim panel of left B-pillar
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “13.3 Removing and installing the rear parking aid warning buzzer H15 ”, page 215

13.2 Removing and installing the parking aid

control unit - J446-

Note

You can find the contact assignment in ⇒ Current flow diagrams,

Electrical fault finding and Fitting locations.

Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Remove left side trim panel in luggage compartment ⇒ Body
Work; Rep. gr. 70 .

214 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Unscrew nuts -arrows- and take out parking aid control unit
-1-.
– Unlock and pull off connector -2-.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
If the control unit for the parking aid - J446- is replaced:
– Code control unit⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester.
Tightening torques
Fixing nuts for control unit for the parking 2 Nm
aid - J446- (-arrows-)

13.3 Removing and installing the rear parking

aid warning buzzer - H15-
Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Remove top B-pillar trim panel on left ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr.
70 .
– Remove plastic button rivets -arrows-.
– Disconnect plug.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

13.4 Removing and installing the front park‐

ing aid warning buzzer - H22-
The warning buzzer is located next to the relay carrier.
Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Remove the side vent from the dash panel on the driver's side
⇒ Heating, Air Conditioning; Rep. gr. 80 .

13. Parking aid 215

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Remove the side cover on the dash panel -1- on the driver's
side in -direction of arrow-.

Insert your hand to the side of the dash panel and slide the warn‐
ing buzzer -1- out of the mounting to the side of the relay carrier
-arrow-.
– Remove connector -2-.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.
Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

13.5 Removing and installing rear parking aid

senders

Note

♦ The visible area of a new sender must be painted in the colour

of the bumper before installing.
♦ The parking aid senders must only be painted with a max. 100
µm thick layer of paint. Before painting the sender, the rear
parts of the sender (terminal connection) must be affixed.
♦ Only the upper part (visible part) of the sender membrane is
painted.
♦ To make it easier to remove the retaining tabs in direction of
arrow -A-, you can use a larger pair of pliers for Seeger rings
with bent jaws.

Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Remove rear bumper ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 63 .

216 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Pull out the retaining lugs on the sender holder in direction of

arrow -A-.
– Press out the sender on the outer side of the shock absorber
inwards.
– Disconnect plug.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– Press the sender into the holder until the catches click audibly.

13.6 Removing and installing front parking

aid sender

Note

♦ Senders fitted in painted areas – the visible area of a new

sender must be painted in the colour of the bumper before
installing.
♦ The parking aid senders must only be painted with a max. 100
µm thick layer of paint. Before painting the sender, the rear
parts of the sender (terminal connection) must be affixed.
♦ Only the upper part (visible part) of the sender membrane is
painted.
♦ To make it easier to remove the catches -arrow A- you can use
a larger set of circlip pliers with bent jaws.

Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Remove the front sender-bumper attached to the middle of the
vehicle ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 63 .
– Sensors installed on the edge of the bumper - Remove the fog
lights or the cover under the fog lights, see
⇒ “10.1 Removing and installing the fog lights, vehicles man‐
Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
ufactured until CW 50.2019”, page 192 or by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
unless authorised
⇒ “10.2 Removing and installing with
fogrespect
lights, vehicles
to the manufac‐
correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
tured from CW 51.2019.”, page 193 .
– Remove retaining lugs arrows -A-.
– Press out the sender -1- on the outer side of the shock ab‐
sorber inwards.
– Remove connector -2-.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– Press the sender into the holder until the catches click audibly.

13. Parking aid 217

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

13.7 Parking aid sender holder - assignment,

fitting location, gluing procedure, drilling
of holes
⇒ “13.7.1 Assignment of the sender holder”, page 218
⇒ “13.7.2 Fitting position of the sender holders”, page 218
⇒ “13.7.3 Gluing procedure of the sender holders”, page 219
⇒ “13.7.4 Drilling holes for sender holder”, page 219

13.7.1 Assignment of the sender holder

The sender holders are different in shape and must be assigned
to the relevant fitting location. The inner and outer sender holders
are not identical see ⇒ Electronic Catalogue of Original Parts
“ETKA” .

13.7.2 Fitting position of the sender holders

Front bumper:
– The correct fitting position is determined by the lug on the
holder, arrow -A- and the contour of the holder on the bumper
and/or the cylinder lug, arrow -B-.

Rear bumper:

218 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

The correct fitting position is determined by the cylinder lug

-arrow- on the sender holder and/or the lug on the holder -2- and
the contour of the holder on the bumper -1-.

13.7.3 Gluing procedure of the sender holders

– Clean and thoroughly degrease the marked adhesive area
-1- with isopropyl (technical alcohol).
– Evenly apply agent to improve adhesion of the plastic (e.g. D
822 150 A1 - see ⇒ Electronic Catalogue of Original Parts
“ETKA” ) in the marked adhesive area -1-.
– Let the activator dry off for approx. 5 min.

Note

♦ Pay attention to the fitting position

⇒ “13.7.2 Fitting position of the sender holders”, page 218 and
the assignment of the sender holders
⇒ “13.7.1 Assignment of the sender holder”, page 218 .
♦ A centering pin must be used for precisely centering the holder
in the bumper or gluing the holder with inserted parking aid
sender on which the decoupling ring (black silicone ring) is
placed.
♦ The application force and the application time determine the
durability of the bonding!

– Remove the protective foils from both sides of the adhesive

tape and press the sender holder -2- into the front bumper for
approx. 10 seconds while applying high force.

13.7.4 Drilling holes for sender holder

The procedure for drilling holes in the bumper for the sender
holder can be found in the ⇒ Body Work - fitting locations; Rep.
gr. 63 .

13.8 Self-diagnosis of the parking aid

The parking aid system is equipped with self-diagnosis. Carry out
“self-diagnosis” with the ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester in the function
“Targeted fault finding”.

13. Parking aid 219

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

14 Reversing camera system

⇒ “14.1 General description”, page 220
⇒ “14.2 Overview of components - Reversing camera system”,
page 220
⇒ “14.3 Removing and installing handle with rear view camera”,
page 221
⇒ “14.4 Removing and installing the rear view camera spray noz‐
zle”, page 222

14.1 General description

The reversing camera system helps the driver when reversing.
This works by showing the driver an image of the traffic situation
behind the vehicle in the radio navigation system monitor.
When the ignition is switched on or the engine is running, the
system will switch on by putting the gear into reverse when the
radio navigation system is switched off.

Note

♦ When handling a fault, it is absolutely essential to know the

function and operation of the reversing camera system.
♦ Additional information and description of function ⇒ Rapid
Owner's Manual .
♦ Calibration of the rear view camera is not necessary.
♦ The reversing camera system image does not appear on the
radio navigation system until after a full system start. Like a
computer, the radio navigation system needs a few seconds
for the system to start after being switched on.

The reversing camera system consists of the following compo‐

nents:
♦ Rear view camera - R189-
♦ Control unit with display unit for radio and navigation system
- J503-

14.2 Overview of components - Reversing camera system

220 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

1 - Control unit with display for

radio and navigation system -
J503-
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “3.4 Removing and in‐
stalling the Infotainment
display/control unit”,
page 76
2 - Rear view camera - R189-
❑ firmly connected with
the grip strip
❑ Removing and installing
handle with rear view
camera
⇒ “14.3 Removing and
installing handle with
rear view camera”, page
221
❑ Equipped with spray
nozzle for camera lens
from CW 22.2016
❑ Removing and installing
spray nozzle
⇒ “14.4 Removing and
installing the rear view
camera spray nozzle”,
page 222

14.3 Removing and installing handle with

rear view camera
The rear view camera - R189- is installed in the handle button of
the rear lid and is firmly connected to the handle button.
The grip strip must be replaced when replacing the rear view
camera.
Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Remove the bottom tailgate trim panel ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr.
70 .
Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
– Disconnectunless
the authorised
hose for by the spray
ŠKODA AUTOnozzle of the
A. S. ŠKODA AUTO rear
A. S.view cam‐
does not guarantee or accept any liability
era. with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

14. Reversing camera system 221

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Release the grip with the camera -1- from the catches
-arrows- step by step and remove.
– Unlock and disconnect the connector of the rear view camera.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– Press the grip with the camera on the concealed frame step
by step (starting from the left side and left rear tab) into the
assembly opening until the catch pegs click audibly into place.
– Perform a functional test.

14.4 Removing and installing the rear view

camera spray nozzle
Removing
– Remove rear view camera
⇒ “14.3 Removing and installing handle with rear view cam‐
era”, page 221 .
– Unlock spray nozzle -1- -arrow-.
– Pull spray nozzle -1- out of the rear view camera -2-.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– Perform a functional test.

222 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

96 – Lights, bulbs, switches - interior

1 Interior lights and warning light for
front passenger airbag deactivation
⇒ “1.1 Removing and installing the front interior light”, page 223
⇒ “1.2 Removing and installing the rear interior light”, page 224
⇒ “1.3 Removing and installing the rear interior light on the left
and right”, page 225
⇒ “1.4 Removing and installing glove box light”, page 225
⇒ “1.5 Removing and installing the light for the storage bag in the
front door trim”, page 226
⇒ “1.6 Removing and installing the front footwell light”,
page 226
⇒ “1.7 Removing and installing the centre console glove com‐
partment light”, page 227
⇒ “1.8 Removing and installing luggage compartment light”, page
228
⇒ “1.9 Removing and installing the warning light for front passen‐
ger airbag Protected
switch-off function”, page 228
by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
1.1 Removing and installing the front interior
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

light
Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Carefully lower light scattering cover -arrow- and remove.

1. Interior lights and warning light for front passenger airbag deactivation 223
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Release two screws -1-.

– Remove the interior light downwards and disconnect the con‐
nectors.

Note

It is necessary to not remove the interior light to replace the light

bulb.

– Light bulb -2- without base W5W.

– Light bulb -3- Soffitte C10W.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.
Tightening torques
Fixing screws for interior light 2 Nm

1.2 Removing and installing the rear interior

light
Removing

Caution

When using
Protected by the lever
copyright. tool,formask
Copying private orpoints where
commercial thein lever
purposes, part or intool isis not permitted
whole,
applied
unless using commercially
authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. available adhesive
S. ŠKODA AUTO tape.
A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!

– Carefully lever out the interior light -1- from the opening in the
moulded headliner -arrow- using the removal wedge - 3409- .
– Disconnect plug.

– Remove the light bulb -1- if necessary -2- (Soffitte C6W or

C5W) from the clamping sleeve and replace it.
Installing
– Mount the plug and clip the lamp back into the assembly open‐
ing.

224 Rep. gr.96 - Lights, bulbs, switches - interior

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

1.3 Removing and installing the rear interior

light on the left and right
Removing

Caution

When using the lever tool, mask points where the lever tool is
applied using commercially available adhesive tape.

– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!

– Carefully release the catch -arrow- with a small cross-head
screwdriver, tilt out the interior light and remove.
– Disconnect plug.

– Push out lens -arrow- and replace light bulb (C5W).

Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

1.4 Removing and installing glove box light

Removing

Caution

When using the lever tool, mask points where the lever tool is
applied using commercially available adhesive tape.

– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!

1. Interior lights and warning light for front passenger airbag deactivation 225
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Place a cross-head screwdriver under the light scattering cov‐

er -arrow- and carefully lever out the lamp.
– Disconnect the plug connection.
– Remove the light bulb W5W and replace it.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

1.5 Removing and installing the light for the

storage bag in the front door trim

Note

The lighting is fitted with LEDs, which cannot be replaced sepa‐

rately.

Removing

Caution

When using the lever tool, mask points where the lever tool is
applied using commercially available adhesive tape.

– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!

– Place a cross-head screwdriver under the lens and carefully
loosen light -1- from the clips -arrows- and remove it.
– Disconnect plug.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

1.6 Removing and installing the front foot‐

well light
Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
Note

♦ When removing and installing the footwell lighting on the front

passenger side, the work procedure is identical to the one on
the driver side.
♦ The lighting is fitted with LEDs, which cannot be replaced sep‐
arately.

226 Rep. gr.96 - Lights, bulbs, switches - interior

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

Removing

Caution

When using the lever tool, mask points where the lever tool is
applied using commercially available adhesive tape.

– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!

– Press the latch -1- with a slotted screwdriver in area of the
arrow -A- and carefully release the lamp -2-.
– Disconnect the plug connection.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

1.7 Removing and installing the centre con‐

sole glove compartment light

Note

The lighting is fitted with LEDs, which cannot be replaced sepa‐

rately.

Removing

Caution

When using the lever tool, mask points where the lever tool is
applied using commercially available adhesive tape.
Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

– Lever off the cover -1- using the disassembly wedge - 3409-
-arrow-.

1. Interior lights and warning light for front passenger airbag deactivation 227
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Loosen light -1- from the clips -arrows- and remove it.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

1.8 Removing and installing luggage com‐

partment light
Removing

Caution

When using the lever tool, mask points where the lever tool is
applied using commercially available adhesive tape.

– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!

– Place a cross-head screwdriver under the lens and carefully
lever out the light.
– Disconnect the plug connection.
– Remove the light bulb W5W and replace it.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
1.9 Removing and installing
correctness of informationthe warning
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
light for front passenger airbag switch-
off function
Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
Vehicles manufactured up to CW 50.2019:

228 Rep. gr.96 - Lights, bulbs, switches - interior

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Remove centre vent -2- ⇒ Heating, Air Conditioning; Rep. gr.

80 .
– Remove connector -3-.
– Press the warning light with the warning light switch -1- out of
the centre vents towards the outside -arrow-.
Vehicles manufactured as of CW 51.2019 (facelift):

Caution

When using the lever tool, mask points where the lever tool is
applied using commercially available adhesive tape.

– Lever out the warning light with warning light switch from the
side with the disassembly wedge from the central air outlets.
– Disconnect plug.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

1. Interior lights and warning light for front passenger airbag deactivation 229
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

2 Switches on the dash panel, in the

centre console, in the doors and in
the roof cover
⇒ “2.1 Removing and installing light switch”, page 230
⇒ “2.2 Removing and installing the headlight range control ad‐
juster”, page 230
⇒ “2.3 Removing and installing the switch for daylight driving
light”, page 231
⇒ “2.4 Removing and installing switches in centre console of the
dash panel”, page 231
⇒ “2.5 Removing and installing the glove box light switch ”, page
232
⇒ “2.6 Removing and installing hazard warning lights button”,
page 233
⇒ “2.7 Removing and installing the mirror adjustment switch”,
page 234
⇒ “2.8 Removing and installing the switch for the power window
lifter”, page 234
⇒ “2.9 Removing and installing starter button E408 ”, page 235
⇒ “2.10 Removing and installing the interior monitoring deactiva‐
tion button as well as the towing protection”, page 236
⇒ “2.11 Removing an installing the push-button for tyre pressure
inspection”, page 236
⇒ “2.12 Removing and installing the rear seat heating switch”,
page 236

2.1 Removing and installing light switch

Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Turn the turning handle of the light switch to position “0”.
– Press in the handle of the light switch firmly in direction of ar‐
row -1- and turn to the right in direction of arrow -2-.
– Hold the turning handle of the light switch in this position and
pull the light switch out towards you in direction of arrow -3-.
– Disconnect connector at switch.
Installing
– Turn the turning handle of the light switch to position “0”.
– Mount plug.
– Carefully push the light switch into the assembly opening until
it audibly locks into place.

2.2 Removing and installing the headlight

range control adjuster
Removing Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
– Switch off the ignition andtoall
with respect theelectrical
correctness ofconsumers!
information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

– Remove the air flow vent from the dash panel on the driver's
side ⇒ Heating, Air Conditioning; Rep. gr. 80 .

230 Rep. gr.96 - Lights, bulbs, switches - interior

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Put hand through the assembly opening for the air flow vent,
press together the retaining tabs -arrows- and remove the ad‐
juster -A- with installation from the mounting frame.
– Disconnect plug.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

2.3 Removing and installing the switch for

daylight driving light
Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Remove the damping trim panel below the dash panel.
– Remove the cover for the fuse carrier below the steering wheel
-arrow-.

– Unclip the switch for the daylight driving light using a small
screwdriver -2- -1- and press out to the inside of the dash
panel.
– Disconnect plug.
Installing
– Mount plug.
– Push the switch into the assembly opening until it audibly locks
into place -1-.

2.4 Removing and installing switches in

centre console of the dash panel
Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
Note

The switches cannot be exchanged separately. In the event of a

fault, replace the complete switch unit.

2. Switches on the dash panel, in the centre console, in the doors and in the roof cover 231
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

Removing

Caution

When using the lever tool, mask points where the lever tool is
applied using commercially available adhesive tape.

– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!

– Lever off the cover -1- at the front using the removal wedge -
3409- -arrow- and remove.

– Remove heating control or air conditioning system control ⇒

Heating, Air Conditioning; Rep. gr. 80 or ⇒ Heating, Air Con‐
ditioning; Rep. gr. 87 ; -Pos. 2- .
– Push the switch unit -1- out of the dash panel from behind
-arrow-.
– Disconnect the plug connections.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.
Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

2.5 Removing and installing the glove box

light switch
⇒ “2.5.1 Remove and install glove box light switch on vehicles
manufactured up to CW 50.2019”, page 232
⇒ “2.5.2 Removal and installation of glove box light switch, vehi‐
cles manufactured from CW 51.2019”, page 233

2.5.1 Remove and install glove box light

switch on vehicles manufactured up to
CW 50.2019
Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!

232 Rep. gr.96 - Lights, bulbs, switches - interior

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Remove storage compartment on passenger side ⇒ Body

Work; Rep. gr. 70 .
– Pull out the bolt -3-.
– Turn stop mechanism -1- by approx. 45° -arrow- and remove.
– If necessary, release the switch -2- from the catch and remove.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– Perform a functional test.

2.5.2 Removal and installation of glove box

light switch, vehicles manufactured from
CW 51.2019
Removing
– Remove the storage compartment in the dash panel on the
front passenger side ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 70 .
– Unclip switch -2- from the catch pegs -arrows- and remove.
– Remove connector -1-.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– Press the switch into the installation location until there is an
audible click.
– Check for proper operation.

2.6 Removing and installing hazard warning

lights button
Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
Vehicles manufactured up to CW 50.2019:

2. Switches on the dash panel, in the centre console, in the doors and in the roof cover 233
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Remove centre vent -2- ⇒ Heating, Air Conditioning; Rep. gr.

80 .
– Disconnect the plug connection at switch -3-.
– Press the hazard warning light switch with warning light for
airbag switch-off -1- out of the centre vents towards the outside
-arrow-.
Vehicles manufactured as of CW 51.2019 (facelift):

Caution

When using the lever tool, mask points where the lever tool is
applied using commercially available adhesive tape.

2.7 Removing and installing the mirror ad‐

justment switch
Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Removing driver door trim panel ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 70 .
– Unplug connector and release switch with a small screwdriver
-arrows-.
– Take out switch.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

2.8 Removing and installing the switch for

the power window lifter

Note

The removal procedure is identical for all types of switches for

power windows.
Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
Removing with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

Caution

When using the lever tool, mask points where the lever tool is
applied using commercially available adhesive tape.

234 Rep. gr.96 - Lights, bulbs, switches - interior

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!

– Slightly raise the switch carrier -1- at the front -arrow- using
the removal wedge - 3409- and remove.
– Disconnect plug.
– Furthermore the operating switch can be removed by releas‐
ing with a small screwdriver and pushing out of the holder
-1-.

2.9 Removing and installing starter button -

E408-
The button is inserted in the immobilizer reading coil.
The reader coil provides emergency start capability, see ⇒ Rapid
Owner's Manual . Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
Removing with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

– Disconnect battery earth strap

⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10 .
– Remove the steering wheel ⇒ Chassis; Rep. gr. 48 .

Note

Before the steering wheel is removed from the shaft, the front
wheels must be brought into the straight ahead position.

– Removing top and bottom steering column trim ⇒ Body Work;

Rep. gr. 68 .
– Disconnect the plug from the button -1- and from the reader
coil -2-.
– Insert two small cross-head screwdrivers (e.g. watch-and-
clock screwdrivers) into the openings -arrows- and press the
sheet pegs.
– Grip the bottom part of the button -1- and press it towards the
outside from the bottom trim panel for steering column.
– When removing the reader coil -2-, start by removing the but‐
ton, then carefully unclip the reader coil with the removal
wedge - 3409- .
Installing
– If removed, first of all insert the immobiliser reader coil -2- and
lock in place.
– Then insert the button -1- into the bottom trim panel and press
until the interlocking lugs lock into place.
– Mount plug and install the bottom and top steering column trim
panel.

2. Switches on the dash panel, in the centre console, in the doors and in the roof cover 235
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

2.10 Removing and installing the interior

monitoring deactivation button as well
as the towing protection
Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Remove bottom trim panel of pillar A on front passenger side
-1- ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 70 .
– Disconnect connector at switch.
– Press together the lateral retaining tabs and remove the button
-2-.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

2.11 Removing an installing the push-button

for tyre pressure inspection
Descriptions of functions and additional information ⇒ Operating
Instruction Rapid .
Removing

Caution

When using the lever tool, mask points where the lever tool is
applied using commercially available adhesive tape.

– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!

– Apply handbrake.
– Using a removal wedge - 3409- or screwdriver, carefully lever
out the switch -1- from the centre console -arrow-.
– Disconnect plug.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

2.12 Removing and installing the rear seat

heating switch
Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!

236
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
Rep. gr.96 - Lights, bulbs, switches - interior
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

Caution

When using the lever tool, mask points where the lever tool is
applied using commercially available adhesive tape.

– Use disassembly wedge - 3409- to unclip the cover -3- to‐

gether with the switches -2- from the trim of the armrest -1-..
– Remove cover -3-, taking into account the lengths of attached
wires.
– Unlock and disconnect plugs of switches -2-.
– Push switches -2- from behind arrow out of the cover -3-.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

2. Switches on the dash panel, in the centre console, in the doors and in the roof cover 237
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

3 Horn
⇒ “3.1 Removing and installing horn”, page 238

3.1 Removing and installing horn

Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Remove noise insulation and front part of left wheelhouse liner
⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 66 .
– Unscrew bolt -1-.
– Remove horn or horns, downwards.
– Disconnect the plug connections -arrows-.
– Remove the horns from the holders - unscrew screw -2-.
– If necessary, release the nuts -3- and remove the holder for
the horn.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.
Tightening torques
Fixing screw for mounting bracket and 20 Nm
horns, Pos. -1- and -2-
Nut, Pos. -3- 12 Nm

238 Rep. gr.96 - Lights, bulbs, switches - interior

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

4 Anti-theft warning system

⇒ “4.1 General description”, page 239
⇒ “4.2 Removing and installing the horn H12 ”, page 239
⇒ “4.3 Removing and installing interior monitoring sensor G273
and vehicle inclination sender G384 ”, page 240
⇒ “4.4 Removing and installing the interior monitoring deactiva‐
tion button”, page 240

4.1 General description

♦ Descriptions of functions and additional information ⇒ Oper‐
ating Instruction Rapid .
♦ The functions of the anti-theft warning system are integrated
in the onboard supply control unit - J519- .
♦ After starting the anti-theft warning system, the alarm source
which is stored in the onboard supply control unit - J519- is
output.
♦ The anti-theft warning system is equipped with self-diagnosis,
which facilitates the fault finding.
Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
♦ For fault finding use ⇒ Vehicleunless
diagnostic
authorised tester.
by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

4.2 Removing and installing the horn - H12-

Note

The horn - H12- has an emergency battery which cannot be re‐

placed as a separate item.

Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Remove plenum chamber cover ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 66 .
– Remove bulkhead ⇒ Body work; Rep. gr. 50 .
– Disconnect plug connection -2-.
– Bore out fastening rivets -arrows- and remove alarm horn
-1-.
– f necessary unscrew nut and remove alarm horn from holder.
Installing

Note

♦ Remove all the drillings.

♦ Any damage to the paintwork must be repaired immediately
by a specialist.

– Secure the alarm horn with new rivets.

– Further installation occurs in reverse order.

4. Anti-theft warning system 239

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

4.3 Removing and installing interior moni‐

toring sensor - G273- and vehicle incli‐
nation sender - G384-
Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Removing the spectacle storage area from the headliner -2-
⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 68 .
– Disconnect plug.
– Completely release sensors -1- from the catches -arrows- and
take out.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– After replacing the sender, you must carry out an adjustment
(parametrisation) with ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester.

4.4 Removing and installing the interior

monitoring deactivation button
Remove and install the interior monitoring deactivation button
⇒ “2.10 Removing and installing the interior monitoring deactiva‐
tion button as well as the towing protection”, page 236 .

240 Rep. gr.96 - Lights, bulbs, switches - interior

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

5 12V power sockets, cigarette lighter

All the notes and comments for this chapter can be found in the
Workshop Manual ⇒ Electrical System - General notes; Rep. gr.
96 . If a note cannot be accessed, open the Workshop Manual
“Electrical System - General Notes” manually in “ELSA”, Section
“96”.

5. 12V power sockets, cigarette lighter 241

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

6 Immobiliser
⇒ “6.1 General description”, page 242
⇒ “6.2 Immobiliser control unit J362 ”, page 243
⇒ “6.3 Ignition key”, page 243
⇒ “6.4 New identity when changing all the components”,
page 244
⇒ “6.5 System test result (online connection)”, page 244

6.1 General description

Immobiliser of the fourth generation with on-line connection and
Download.
An essential component part of the immobiliser of the fourth gen‐
eration is a central database, in which all theft-related data of the
control units involved are stored. It is not possible to adapt the
immobiliser control units without online connection to this data‐
base.
♦ A PIN code request of the immobiliser components by fax or
temporary activation of the components is not possible.
♦ All components associated
Protected with the immobiliser
by copyright. must
Copying for private be adap‐
or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
ted online. unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
♦ All - even re-ordered - ignition keys are already precoded at
the factory for a specific vehicle and can only be initialised for
this vehicle.
♦ When re-ordering ignition keys, the relevant vehicle identifi‐
cation number (VIN code) must be provided.
♦ In Škoda vehicles it is no longer possible to adapt the compo‐
nents of other corporate brands.
Other information:
⇒ Self-study programme No. 87 ; Immobilisers in Škoda vehicles
Immobiliser components:
♦ Immobiliser control unit - J362-
⇒ “6.2 Immobiliser control unit J362 ”, page 243
♦ Engine control unit - J623- diesel engines ⇒ Engine; Rep. gr.
23 , or petrol engines ⇒ Engine; Rep. gr. 24
♦ Ignition key ⇒ “6.3 Ignition key”, page 243
New identity when changing all the immobiliser components
⇒ “6.4 New identity when changing all the components”,
page 244 .
Functions of the immobiliser control unit - J362- :
♦ Communication between all the immobiliser components
♦ Encryption of data between the control units involved
Fault recognition and fault display
The immobiliser is equipped with self-diagnosis, which facilitates
the fault finding.
For fault finding, use the ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester in the mode
“Targeted fault finding”.

242 Rep. gr.96 - Lights, bulbs, switches - interior

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

6.2 Immobiliser control unit - J362-

The immobiliser control unit - J362- is integrated in the dash panel
insert. If the control unit is defective, the complete dash panel
insert must be replaced.
Adapt immobiliser control unit - J362-
– Connect ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester.
– In the ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester, select the operating mode
“Targeted fault-finding”.
– Select the “Selected Functions/Components” and subse‐
quently the following menu points using the button “Skip”:
♦ Body
♦ Electrical system
♦ 01 – Self-diagnosable systems
♦ Immobiliser
♦ Operation
♦ Adjust dash panel insert

6.3 Ignition key

All - even re-ordered - ignition keys are already precoded at the
factory for a specific vehicle and can only be adapted to this ve‐
hicle. When re-ordering ignition keys, the relevant vehicle identi‐
fication number (VIN code) must be provided and subsequently
the new keys must be adapted to the immobiliser control unit -
J362- .

Note

Before replacing the lock set or the control units, the function
“New identity when changing all the components” must be re‐
trieved.

Adapting and checking the ignition key

Note

If new or additional ignition keys are required, they must be adap‐

ted to the immobiliser control unit.

Adapt the ignition key to the immobiliser control unit - J362- or

check:
– Connect ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester.
– In the ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester, select the operating mode
“Targeted fault-finding”.
– Select the “Selected Functions/Components” and subse‐
quently the followingProtected
menu by points using
copyright. the
Copying button
for private “Skip”: purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
or commercial
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
♦ Body with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

♦ Electrical system
♦ 01 – Self-diagnosable systems
♦ Immobiliser
♦ Operation

6. Immobiliser 243
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

♦ Adapt and check the ignition key

Remove and install the battery for the radio control key ⇒ Body
Work - Assembly work; Rep. gr. 57 .
Remove and install the radio container (transmitter unit for the
radio controlled central locking system) of the ignition key ⇒ Body
Work; Rep. gr. 57 .

Note

If the radio container is exchanged additionally, it must also be

adapted with the ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester to the convenience
system.

6.4 New identity when changing all the com‐

ponents
All necessary steps required for the new installation of all the im‐
mobiliser components are carried out with this programme.
– Connect ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester.
– In the ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester, select the operating mode
“Targeted fault-finding”.
– Select the “Selected Functions/Components” and subse‐
quently the following menu points using the button “Skip”:
♦ Body
♦ Electrical system
♦ 01 – Self-diagnosable systems
♦ Immobiliser
♦ Operation
♦ New identity

6.5 System test result (online connection)

The following steps are carried out with this test programme:
♦ System test for the online connection
♦ Verification of user authorisation
♦ Test the correct cable connection to the Škoda database
The precondition for this is the online connection (network con‐
nection) of the tester.
– Connect ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester.
– In the ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester, select the operating mode
“Targeted fault-finding”.
– Select the “Selected Functions/Components” and subse‐
quently the following menu points using the button “Skip”:
♦ Body
♦ Electrical system
♦ 01 – Self-diagnosable systems
♦ Immobiliser
♦ unless
Operation
Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
♦ Online system test

244 Rep. gr.96 - Lights, bulbs, switches - interior

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

97 – Wiring
1 Fuse holder and relay carrier
⇒ “1.1 Removing and installing fuse holder from dash panel”,
page 245
⇒ “1.2 Removing and installing the E-box in engine compartment”,
page 246
⇒ “1.3 Removing and installing relay and fuse holder behind dash
panel on the driver's side”, page 249
⇒ “1.4 Removing and installing the relay of the relay carrier”, page
250

1.1 Removing and installing fuse holder

from dash panel

Note

Exact assignment of connections at fuse holder and relay carrier

can be found in ⇒ Current flow diagrams, Electrical fault finding
and Fitting locations.

Removing
– Disconnect battery earth strap
⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10 .
– Remove the damper below the dash panel on the driver side
⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 70 .
– Open cover of fuse holder -arrow- and remove.

– Unscrew the screws -arrows- and unhook the fuse holder

downwards.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– Pay attention to the work sequence when re-connecting the
battery
⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10 .
Tightening torques
Fixing screws for fuse holder 2.5 Nm

1. Fuse holder and relay carrier 245

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

1.2 Removing and installing the E-box in en‐

gine compartment
⇒ “1.2.1 Removing and installing the E-box in engine compart‐
ment up to CW 21.2015”, page 246
⇒ “1.2.2 Removing and installing the E-box in engine compart‐
ment as of CW 22.2015”, page 247

1.2.1 Removing and installing the E-box in en‐

gine compartment up to CW 21.2015
Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Vehicles with TDI engines - push off the retaining tab in direc‐
tion of arrow -A- with a screwdriver and push the automatic
glow period control unit - J179- Pos. -1- away from the support
-2- in direction of arrow -B-.
– Disconnect plug.
– Disconnect the battery earth strap -4-
⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10 .

– Fold open the cover -3- and slacken the nut of the positive
terminal -2-.
– Slightly press down the catches one after the other using a
screwdriver, then release by tilting the screwdriver in direction
of arrow -A- and fold the fuse box with the positive terminal
-1- to the side in direction of arrow -B-.

246 Rep. gr.97 - Wiring

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Successively detach the cover -1- from the catches -2- using
a screwdriver, in direction of arrow -A-.
– Swivel out the cover in direction of arrow -B- and remove.
– Unscrew the fixing nuts for the connection cables and remove
the fuse box.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.
Tightening torques
Fixing nuts for connection cable M 6 6 Nm
Fixing nuts for connection cable M 5 4.5 Nm

1.2.2 Removing and installing the E-box in en‐

gine compartment as of CW 22.2015
Removing
– Disconnect ground strap from the battery
⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10 .
Vehicles with TDI engine: Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
– Press off catch peg -arrow- and automatic
with respect glow
to the correctness period incontrol
of information this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
unit - J179- Pos. -1- upwards out of the e-box.
Continued for all vehicles

– Disconnect the cable ties -arrows- on the electric cables at the

holder -1-.

1. Fuse holder and relay carrier 247

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Press off catch in -direction of arrow- and remove housing

cover -1- at holder -2-.

– Mark the position of the electric cables -1-.

Note

♦ The exact connection assignment of electric cables can be

taken from the valid current flow diagram, see ⇒ Current flow
diagrams, Electrical fault finding and Fitting locations.
♦ Where necessary, photos should be taken of the connection
assignment.

– Unscrew nuts -1- and screw -2- and remove electric cables.

– Press off latches -arrow- and remove the E-Box -2- from the
mounting bracket -1-.
– Mark the position and then disconnect the electrical connec‐
tors and lines underneath the e-box.

Note
Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
♦ The exact connection assignment of electric
unless authorised by ŠKODAcables can
AUTO A. S. be AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
ŠKODA
taken from the valid current with
flowrespect
diagram, see ⇒ Current flow
to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

diagrams, Electrical fault finding and Fitting locations.

♦ Where necessary, take photos of the electrical cables.

– When removing the e-box mounting bracket - undo screw

-arrow- in the left wheel arch.

248 Rep. gr.97 - Wiring

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Undo the latch -arrow- and remove mounting bracket -1- from
the bodyshell by moving it upwards.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– Latch the e-box mounting bracket on to the bodyshell, e-box
in the mounting bracket and e-box housing cover.
– Connecting battery
⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10 .
Tightening torques
M6 nuts of the electric cables to 6 Nm
the e-box
M8 screw of the electric cables 6 Nm
to the E-box
Screw for holder in left wheel 2 Nm
arch

1.3 Removing Protected

and installing relay
by copyright. Copying and
for private fuse purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
or commercial

holder behind dashto thepanel onof the driver's

unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect correctness information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.

side
Removing
– Disconnect battery earth strap
⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10 .
– Removing the dash panel ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 70 .
– Remove onboard supply control unit - J519-
⇒ “2.1.2 Removing and installing the vehicle voltage control
unit J519 ”, page 252 .
– Take all relays -1- from the relay carrier -2-.

Note

♦ The number of relays depends on the vehicle equipment.

♦ The exact relay position assignment and relay ⇒ Current flow
diagrams, Electrical fault finding and Fitting locations.
♦ Where necessary, take photos of the relay position assign‐
ment and relay.

– Unlock the catches -arrows- in sequence and remove the con‐

nectors -1- from the relay carrier -2-.

1. Fuse holder and relay carrier 249

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Disconnect the cable ties -arrows- and slacken the thread

-2-.
– Unscrew screws -3- and remove relay carrier -1-.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– Insert all connectors into the relay carrier until they engage.
– Secure the electrical cables with cable ties.
– Connecting battery
⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10 .
Tightening torques
Fixing screws for relay and fuse carrier, 4.5 Nm
Pos. -3-

1.4 Removing and installing the relay of the

relay carrier
Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Remove the damper below the dash panel on the driver side
⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 70 .
– Slacken fuse holder -1- from the dash panel and unhook
downwards
⇒ “1.1 Removing and installing fuse holder from dash panel”,
page 245 .
– The dash panel side trim panel ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 70 if
necessary light switch -2-
⇒ “2.1 Removing and installing light switch”, page 230 and air
flow vent on the driver's side can be removed for the purposes
of clear presentation of the assignment of the individual relays
⇒ Heating, Air Conditioning; Rep.
Protected by gr.Copying
copyright. 80 . for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
– Put the hand behind thewith
dash panel
respect -arrow- ofand
to the correctness take inthe
information this cor‐
document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
responding relay if necessary the fuse out of the relay carrier
-3-.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

Note

The number of relays depends on the vehicle equipment.

250 Rep. gr.97 - Wiring

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

2 Control units
⇒ “2.1 Onboard supply control unit J519 ”, page 251
⇒ “2.2 Removing and installing data bus diagnostic interface J533
”, page 253

2.1 Onboard supply control unit - J519-

⇒ “2.1.1 General description”, page 251
⇒ “2.1.2 Removing and installing the vehicle voltage control unit
J519 ”, page 252

2.1.1 General description

The vehicle voltage control unit - J519- depending on the vehicle
equipment in the vehicle has the following tasks:
♦ Central locking control
♦ Anti-theft warning system control
♦ Tailgate lock
♦ Signal reception of remote control
♦ Position display of the central locking system
♦ Operating terminal 30
♦ Load management intervention
♦ Interior lighting control
♦ Pre-activation of the fuel pump
♦ Actuation of the windscreen wiper, windscreen washer system
and periodic wiping
♦ Exterior mirror and rear window heater
♦ Turn signal light and warning light control
♦ Brake light operation
♦ Horn
♦ Cruise control system (signal conversion to the CAN databus
of the drive system)
♦ Remote release of the tailgate
♦ Switch and instrument lighting
♦ Starter interlock
♦ Rear fog light and reversing light control (not on all equipment)
♦ switches off the electrical consumers at low Copying
Protected by copyright. voltage (loador commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
for private
management) unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
♦ Data bus diagnostic interface - J533-
The onboard supply control unit - J519- is equipped with self-di‐
agnosis, which facilitates fault finding.
For fault finding use ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester.

2. Control units 251

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

2.1.2 Removing and installing the vehicle volt‐

age control unit - J519-

Note

♦ When replacing the vehicle voltage control unit - J519- with

integrated data bus diagnostic interface - J533- , the ⇒ Vehicle
diagnostic tester must be connected before removing the con‐
trol unit and the function “Replace control unit” must be selec‐
ted in the operating mode “Targeted fault finding”. Then code
the new control unit after the installation see ⇒ Vehicle diag‐
nostic tester.
♦ The control unit can also be coded via an On-line connection.
In this case, the ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester must be connected
before removing the control unit from the vehicle.
♦ The connectors can only be connected in one position, they
must not be mixed up.

Removing
The control unit is located below the dash panel on the driver side
and behind the relay carrier.
– Disconnect battery earth strap
⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10 .
– If present, remove the damping below the dash panel on the
driver side ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 70 .
– Remove “A” pillar trim, bottom left ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 70 .
Vehicles manufactured up to CW 21.2015:
– Unlock and disconnect the plug connections -3- by tilting out
the clamps -2-. Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
– Detach the control unit -1- from the support by releasing
with respect the of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
to the correctness
latches in direction of arrow -A-.
– Swivel out the control unit in direction of arrow -B- and remove.
Vehicles manufactured as of CW 22.2015:

– Press the catch -1- and tilt out release lever for connectors in
sequence in -direction of arrow-.

252 Rep. gr.97 - Wiring

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Disconnect plug connection -1-.

– Press of the catches in -direction of arrow-, tilt the unit -2- out
of the mounting bracket -3- and remove downwards.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– Insert the control unit and correctly lock into the holder.
– Pay attention to the work sequence when re-connecting the
battery
⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10 .

2.2 Removing and installing data bus diag‐

nostic interface - J533-
⇒ “2.2.1 Remove and install data bus diagnostic interface J533
on vehicles manufactured up to CW 50.2019”, page 253
⇒ “2.2.2 Removing and installing the Diagnostics interface for da‐
ta bus J533 , vehicles manufactured from CW 51.2019 (facelift)”,
page 253

2.2.1 Remove and install data bus diagnostic

interface - J533- on vehicles manufac‐
tured up to CW 50.2019

Note

♦ The diagnostics interface for data bus - J533- is integrated in

the onboard control unit - J519- and cannot be removed sep‐
arately.
♦ In the event of an error, the onboard control unit - J519- must
be replaced.
Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
Removingunless
andauthorised
installing onboard
by ŠKODA supply
AUTO A. S. ŠKODA control
AUTO A.unit - J519-
S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
⇒ “2.1.2 Removing
with respect and installingof the
to the correctness vehicle
information in thisvoltage controlbyunit
document. Copyright ŠKODA AUTO A. S.
J519 ”, page 252

2.2.2 Removing and installing the Diagnostics

interface for data bus - J533- , vehicles
manufactured from CW 51.2019 (face‐
lift)

Note

If the data bus diagnostic interface Gateway - J533- is replaced,

select the “replace control unit” function of the respective control
unit in operating mode “Targeted fault finding” or “Guided Func‐
tions” ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester.

Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Remove the storage compartment in the dash panel on the
front passenger side ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 70 .

2. Control units 253

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

– Press lugs arrow -A- and remove diagnostics interface for data
bus - J533- , Pos. -2- in the direction of arrow -B- from the
holder -1-.
– Remove connector -3-.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

254 Rep. gr.97 - Wiring

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

3 Vehicle diagnosis, testing and infor‐

mation systems
For the following descriptions, see Workshop Manual ⇒ Electrical
System – General notes; Rep. gr. 97 . If a note cannot be ac‐
cessed, open the Workshop Manual “Electrical System - General
Notes” manually in “ELSA”, Section “97”.
♦ Use and safety instructions.
♦ Connect ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester.

3. Vehicle diagnosis, testing and information systems 255

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

4 Wiring harness and plug repair

All the notes and comments for the following chapters can be
found in the Workshop Manual ⇒ Electrical System - General
notes; Rep. gr. 97 If a note cannot be accessed, open the Work‐
shop Manual “Electrical System - General Notes” manually in
“ELSA”, Section “97”.
♦ General instructions for the repair on the vehicle electrics
♦ General instructions for wiring harness and plug repair
♦ Repair of airbag and belt tensioner cables
♦ Repair of CAN bus lines

256 Rep. gr.97 - Wiring

Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 12.2019

5 Use contact surface cleaning set -

VAS 6410-
All the notes and comments for the following chapters can be
found in the Workshop Manual ⇒ Electrical System - General
notes; Rep. gr. 97 If a note cannot be accessed, open the Work‐
shop Manual “Electrical System - General Notes” manually in
“ELSA”, Section “97”.
♦ Repairing the cable eyes
♦ Repairing screwed connections
♦ Cleaning the battery pole terminals and battery poles
♦ Preserving

5. Use contact surface cleaning set VAS 6410 257

VW Passat b6 Electrical System Diagram
100% (1)
VW Passat b6 Electrical System Diagram
459 pages
VW Crafter 2006 2016 Electrical System Eng
100% (3)
VW Crafter 2006 2016 Electrical System Eng
222 pages
Volkswagen Golf 2015 Repair Manual - Electrical Equipment
100% (1)
Volkswagen Golf 2015 Repair Manual - Electrical Equipment
320 pages
Skoda Rapid Electrical System Eng PDF
No ratings yet
Skoda Rapid Electrical System Eng PDF
240 pages
Gulliver S Travels Usborne Young Reading PDF
100% (1)
Gulliver S Travels Usborne Young Reading PDF
66 pages
Skoda Fabia Electric Repair
No ratings yet
Skoda Fabia Electric Repair
152 pages
Sistema Eléctrico Audi A4 B9 8W
No ratings yet
Sistema Eléctrico Audi A4 B9 8W
327 pages
Seat Leon 3 Electrical System Eng
0% (1)
Seat Leon 3 Electrical System Eng
290 pages
Service: Polo/Vento 2014-2018
67% (3)
Service: Polo/Vento 2014-2018
294 pages
Skoda Octavia 3 Electrical System Eng
100% (1)
Skoda Octavia 3 Electrical System Eng
212 pages
VW Passat b7 Electrical System Eng
75% (4)
VW Passat b7 Electrical System Eng
365 pages
VW Atlas - Electrical Equipment
No ratings yet
VW Atlas - Electrical Equipment
266 pages
Grand Canal in Venice
No ratings yet
Grand Canal in Venice
9 pages
Workshop Manual Transporter 2016 28-29
No ratings yet
Workshop Manual Transporter 2016 28-29
331 pages
Electrical System
No ratings yet
Electrical System
156 pages
VW T6-Electrical System
No ratings yet
VW T6-Electrical System
311 pages
Electrical System PDF
No ratings yet
Electrical System PDF
460 pages
VW Passat b8 Electrical System Eng
No ratings yet
VW Passat b8 Electrical System Eng
344 pages
Electrical_system
No ratings yet
Electrical_system
325 pages
SM_55.c
No ratings yet
SM_55.c
339 pages
Skoda Octavia 3 2013-2014 Eletrical System Octavia - III - 2013
No ratings yet
Skoda Octavia 3 2013-2014 Eletrical System Octavia - III - 2013
193 pages
Electrical System
No ratings yet
Electrical System
284 pages
SM 28
No ratings yet
SM 28
203 pages
Skoda Kodiaq Electrical System Eng
No ratings yet
Skoda Kodiaq Electrical System Eng
210 pages
VW Tiguan 2 Electrical System Eng
No ratings yet
VW Tiguan 2 Electrical System Eng
321 pages
VW Golf 8 Electrical System Eng
No ratings yet
VW Golf 8 Electrical System Eng
244 pages
VW Sharan 2011 Electrical System Eng
No ratings yet
VW Sharan 2011 Electrical System Eng
289 pages
D4B802B7E7F Electrical System
No ratings yet
D4B802B7E7F Electrical System
193 pages
D4B804B24CA Electrical Equipment
No ratings yet
D4B804B24CA Electrical Equipment
358 pages
Electrical System
No ratings yet
Electrical System
171 pages
D4B8056C0B3-Electrical Equipment PDF
100% (1)
D4B8056C0B3-Electrical Equipment PDF
313 pages
Audi q7 2016 Electrical Equipment Eng
No ratings yet
Audi q7 2016 Electrical Equipment Eng
310 pages
Electrical System - Wiring Diagrams
No ratings yet
Electrical System - Wiring Diagrams
321 pages
Electrical System
No ratings yet
Electrical System
193 pages
D3E804E4936 Electrical System
No ratings yet
D3E804E4936 Electrical System
166 pages
VW Golf 7 Electrical Equipment Eng
No ratings yet
VW Golf 7 Electrical Equipment Eng
355 pages
VW Up 2017 Electrical System Eng
No ratings yet
VW Up 2017 Electrical System Eng
165 pages
SM 16
No ratings yet
SM 16
298 pages
D4B8059399E_A4-Electrical_system
No ratings yet
D4B8059399E_A4-Electrical_system
411 pages
Electrical System
0% (1)
Electrical System
203 pages
K0059020020 Electrical System
No ratings yet
K0059020020 Electrical System
459 pages
Electrical System
No ratings yet
Electrical System
404 pages
Vw Atlas Electrical Equipment Eng
No ratings yet
Vw Atlas Electrical Equipment Eng
285 pages
Electrical System
100% (2)
Electrical System
227 pages
Audi q5 2008 Electrical Equipment Eng
No ratings yet
Audi q5 2008 Electrical Equipment Eng
414 pages
Electrical System
No ratings yet
Electrical System
445 pages
SM 15
No ratings yet
SM 15
219 pages
vw-jetta-7-electrical-equipment-eng
No ratings yet
vw-jetta-7-electrical-equipment-eng
260 pages
VW Golf 2015 Electrical Equipment Eng
No ratings yet
VW Golf 2015 Electrical Equipment Eng
317 pages
TOC-A005A501520-Electrical_system
No ratings yet
TOC-A005A501520-Electrical_system
8 pages
SM 17
No ratings yet
SM 17
435 pages
Service Manual Electrical system 02 99
No ratings yet
Service Manual Electrical system 02 99
177 pages
D3E802A6B9C-Electrical_system
No ratings yet
D3E802A6B9C-Electrical_system
349 pages
Sistema Electrico Toureg
No ratings yet
Sistema Electrico Toureg
538 pages
Jetta MK6 Repair Manual Electrical Equipment
No ratings yet
Jetta MK6 Repair Manual Electrical Equipment
346 pages
Sharan Electrical System
No ratings yet
Sharan Electrical System
258 pages
Electrical Up To 2010
No ratings yet
Electrical Up To 2010
367 pages
SM 40
No ratings yet
SM 40
133 pages
Jetta 2005
100% (8)
Jetta 2005
315 pages
Lock 'n Load Tactical Core Rules v5.0
From Everand
Lock 'n Load Tactical Core Rules v5.0
David Heath
No ratings yet
Securing ChatGPT: Best Practices for Protecting Sensitive Data in AI Language Models
From Everand
Securing ChatGPT: Best Practices for Protecting Sensitive Data in AI Language Models
Matthew C. Smith
No ratings yet
Gray Hat Hacking the Ethical Hacker's
From Everand
Gray Hat Hacking the Ethical Hacker's
Çağatay Şanlı
5/5 (1)
The Signal
No ratings yet
The Signal
15 pages
PENDALAMAN MATERI BAHASA INGGRIS KELAS 8 Present Cont
No ratings yet
PENDALAMAN MATERI BAHASA INGGRIS KELAS 8 Present Cont
3 pages
Credits
No ratings yet
Credits
65 pages
CS99_dress_for_a_grown_up_E
No ratings yet
CS99_dress_for_a_grown_up_E
1 page
"Just Kids From The Bronx" Excerpt.
No ratings yet
"Just Kids From The Bronx" Excerpt.
4 pages
Terminology of Swimming
No ratings yet
Terminology of Swimming
8 pages
Abigail Birkhead - I Dont Need You Anymore
No ratings yet
Abigail Birkhead - I Dont Need You Anymore
2 pages
Download ebooks file Frommer s Hawaii 2005 Jeanette Foster all chapters
No ratings yet
Download ebooks file Frommer s Hawaii 2005 Jeanette Foster all chapters
77 pages
Amielia Batrishia Binti Mokhtar AT1083318 SECTION 03A
No ratings yet
Amielia Batrishia Binti Mokhtar AT1083318 SECTION 03A
2 pages
A Brief History of The Video Game Industry
No ratings yet
A Brief History of The Video Game Industry
2 pages
Sonic The Movie
No ratings yet
Sonic The Movie
1 page
Phrasal Verbs Crossword Puzzle Crosswords Fun Activities Games Icebreakers Oneono 58418 1
100% (1)
Phrasal Verbs Crossword Puzzle Crosswords Fun Activities Games Icebreakers Oneono 58418 1
2 pages
FIFA World Cup Qatar 2022-Match Schedule
No ratings yet
FIFA World Cup Qatar 2022-Match Schedule
2 pages
Annotated Bibliography Tangled
No ratings yet
Annotated Bibliography Tangled
3 pages
Sony Str-De675 Ver1.2
No ratings yet
Sony Str-De675 Ver1.2
46 pages
Jordan Creek Greenway & Trail Status Map 2018
No ratings yet
Jordan Creek Greenway & Trail Status Map 2018
1 page
Ain't It Fun - Lyrics
No ratings yet
Ain't It Fun - Lyrics
2 pages
New Balance 327 New Balance 327: Barcode Information Barcode Information
No ratings yet
New Balance 327 New Balance 327: Barcode Information Barcode Information
1 page
Sadržaj Igrice Danteov Pakao
No ratings yet
Sadržaj Igrice Danteov Pakao
2 pages
ChangeLog_Mednaffe
No ratings yet
ChangeLog_Mednaffe
4 pages
SMP Mts English On Sky (K13) Chapter 10
No ratings yet
SMP Mts English On Sky (K13) Chapter 10
22 pages
Savagetales Issue10
No ratings yet
Savagetales Issue10
40 pages
Teach How To Play The Gamelan
No ratings yet
Teach How To Play The Gamelan
3 pages
Processor Manual
No ratings yet
Processor Manual
85 pages
M270_Transportability_Guidance_TM-55-1425-646-14_1982
No ratings yet
M270_Transportability_Guidance_TM-55-1425-646-14_1982
45 pages
FS650
No ratings yet
FS650
46 pages
Circuit Design
No ratings yet
Circuit Design
20 pages
HKB Mar2014 Startups
No ratings yet
HKB Mar2014 Startups
4 pages

Note: This service is not intended for secure transactions such as banking, social media, email, or purchasing. Use at your own risk. We assume no liability whatsoever for broken pages.